WO2017057222A1 - Method for producing pigment dispersion, method for producing curable composition, method for producing cured film, method for producing solid-state imaging element equipped with cured film, method for producing color filter equipped with cured film, and method for producing image display device equipped with cured film - Google Patents

Method for producing pigment dispersion, method for producing curable composition, method for producing cured film, method for producing solid-state imaging element equipped with cured film, method for producing color filter equipped with cured film, and method for producing image display device equipped with cured film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017057222A1
WO2017057222A1 PCT/JP2016/078165 JP2016078165W WO2017057222A1 WO 2017057222 A1 WO2017057222 A1 WO 2017057222A1 JP 2016078165 W JP2016078165 W JP 2016078165W WO 2017057222 A1 WO2017057222 A1 WO 2017057222A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
producing
pigment
cured film
pigment dispersion
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2016/078165
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
久保田 誠
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN201680051980.5A priority Critical patent/CN108026402A/en
Priority to JP2017543229A priority patent/JP6644803B2/en
Publication of WO2017057222A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017057222A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/44Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D17/00Pigment pastes, e.g. for mixing in paints
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D201/00Coating compositions based on unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D4/00Coating compositions, e.g. paints, varnishes or lacquers, based on organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond ; Coating compositions, based on monomers of macromolecular compounds of groups C09D183/00 - C09D183/16
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40Additives
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/14Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for producing a pigment dispersion, a method for producing a curable composition, a method for producing a cured film, a method for producing a solid-state imaging device comprising a cured film, a method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film, and The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing an image display device having a cured film.
  • the pigment is preferably used as a colorant from the viewpoint of excellent fastness such as light resistance.
  • a predetermined dispersion treatment is performed to dissolve the aggregate, and a pigment dispersion in which the pigment is finely dispersed is prepared and used.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a method of obtaining a pigment dispersion by subjecting a composition containing a pigment and a polymer (dispersant) to a dispersion treatment using beads.
  • An object of this invention is to provide the manufacturing method of a pigment dispersion which can manufacture the pigment dispersion which is short in processing time and excellent in storage stability in view of the said situation. Moreover, this invention comprises the manufacturing method of a curable composition, the manufacturing method of a cured film, the manufacturing method of the solid-state image sensor which comprises a cured film, the manufacturing method of the color filter which comprises a cured film, and a cured film. It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for manufacturing an image display device.
  • the present inventors have found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved by providing a step of preheating a precursor composition containing a predetermined component, and have completed the present invention. That is, the present inventors have found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
  • a method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film comprising: curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
  • the manufacturing method of a pigment dispersion which can manufacture the pigment dispersion which is short in processing time and excellent in storage stability can be provided. Further, according to the present invention, there is provided a method for producing a curable composition, a method for producing a cured film, a method for producing a solid-state imaging device comprising a cured film, a method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film, and a cured film. It is also possible to provide a method for manufacturing the image display device provided.
  • the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • “(meth) acrylate” represents acrylate and methacrylate
  • “(meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl
  • “(meth) acryloyl” represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • the pigment in the present invention means, for example, an insoluble coloring compound that does not dissolve in a solvent.
  • the solvent includes the solvent exemplified in the solvent column described later. Therefore, the coloring compound which does not melt
  • “to” is used in the sense of including the numerical values described before and after it as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • “structural unit” is synonymous with “repeating unit”.
  • One of the features of the present invention is that, first, a precursor composition containing a predetermined component is subjected to a preheating treatment prior to a dispersion treatment using a bead mill.
  • a preheating treatment prior to a dispersion treatment using a bead mill.
  • the dispersion treatment is carried out while heating the precursor composition to a predetermined temperature.
  • such treatment has not always obtained a sufficient effect.
  • a desired effect can be obtained by carrying out a dispersion treatment with a bead mill while maintaining a predetermined temperature.
  • a pigment having a size less than a predetermined size and a dispersant having a predetermined acid value for the components used.
  • the adsorptivity of the dispersant to the pigment is improved, and as a result, a pigment dispersion having better storage stability is obtained. It is estimated that.
  • the method for producing a pigment dispersion of the present invention has at least the following two steps.
  • Step 1 Preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity of 3 to 20 mPa ⁇ s at 25 ° C.
  • Step 2 Liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition
  • each process is explained in full detail. The details of the materials used in this production method will be described in detail later.
  • Step 1 is a step of preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of 3 to 20 mPa ⁇ s.
  • the precursor composition used in this step includes at least a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent. Each component contained in the precursor composition will be described in detail later.
  • the viscosity at 25 ° C. of the precursor composition used in this step is 3 to 20 mPa ⁇ s, the processing time of the dispersion treatment is further shortened, and the storage stability of the pigment dispersion is more excellent 3 to 17 mPa ⁇ s is preferable, and 3 to 15 mPa ⁇ s is more preferable in that at least one of the above is satisfied (hereinafter also referred to simply as “the point where the effect of the present invention is more excellent”).
  • the viscosity is measured using a viscometer RE-85L (manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.) after adjusting the precursor composition to 25 ° C.
  • the precursor composition is preheated (heated).
  • preheating the precursor composition wetting of the organic solvent to the pigment surface is improved, and the dissolution of the dispersant and the homogenization of the dispersion medium proceed.
  • the treatment time is shortened and the storage stability of the pigment dispersion is excellent.
  • the adsorption of the dispersant to the pigment proceeds efficiently from the initial stage of the dispersion treatment, the amount of the unadsorbed dispersant is reduced, so that foreign matter (pigment particles, unadsorbed dispersant, etc.) It was found that the generation of aggregates was suppressed.
  • the temperature of the liquid is preferably preheated to 40 to 60 ° C, more preferably preheated to more than 40 ° C and less than 57 ° C, and preheated to 42 to 50 ° C in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Is more preferable.
  • the temperature of the liquid is preferably preheated to 40 to 60 ° C, more preferably preheated to more than 40 ° C and less than 57 ° C, and preheated to 42 to 50 ° C in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Is more preferable.
  • the preheating time is preferably 5 minutes to 3 hours, more preferably 10 minutes to 2 hours, and further preferably 15 minutes to 1.5 hours.
  • the method for preheating the precursor composition is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted.
  • this process of preheating a precursor composition is a process different from the process 2 (dispersion process process) mentioned later.
  • step 2 a bead mill disperser for performing bead milling is used, but step 1 is a process performed before the precursor composition is supplied into the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser. is there.
  • the crushing chamber is a rotor (rotary rotor) arranged and filled with beads.
  • the beads are agitated by the rotation of the rotor, and shearing force is applied to the pigment in the precursor composition by the agitated beads. It is a room.
  • Step 2 is a step of subjecting the precursor composition to a dispersion treatment by a bead mill while keeping the liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition at 40 ° C. or more and less than 60 ° C. By carrying out this step, the pigment is dissolved and a pigment dispersion having high pigment dispersion stability can be obtained.
  • step 2 a dispersion treatment described later is performed while keeping the liquid temperature of the precursor composition preheated in step 1 at 40 ° C. or higher and lower than 60 ° C. That is, the dispersion treatment is performed on the precursor composition whose liquid temperature is adjusted to 40 ° C. or more and less than 60 ° C.
  • the temperature of the precursor composition is preferably maintained at more than 40 ° C. and less than 57 ° C., more preferably from 42 to 50 ° C., in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • step 1 by maintaining or raising the temperature from the pre-heat treatment (step 1), the adsorption of the dispersant to the pigment proceeds efficiently from the beginning of the dispersion treatment, so the amount of the unadsorbed dispersant can be reduced. It has been found that the reduction reduces the generation of foreign matter (aggregates such as pigment particles and unadsorbed dispersant) over time. In particular, when black pigments and white pigments are used, the pigment surface tends to agglomerate because the activity of the pigment surface is higher than that of chromatic pigments, and the effect is remarkable.
  • the dispersion treatment in step 2 is performed using a known bead mill disperser.
  • the method for supplying the precursor composition preheated in step 1 into the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser is not particularly limited.
  • FIG. 200 and can be continuously supplied from the tank 200 to the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser 500 through the pipe 300 using a pump (not shown).
  • the pipe 300 itself may be heated to a predetermined temperature so that the temperature of the precursor composition W does not change.
  • FIG. 1 shows an embodiment in which the precursor composition W preheated to a predetermined temperature is continuously supplied to the pulverization chamber of the bead mill pulverizer.
  • the present invention is not limited to this embodiment.
  • the precursor composition is circulated so that the further processed precursor composition is supplied to the bead mill again. You may perform a dispersion process, making it.
  • the supply amount (treatment liquid amount) when the preheated precursor composition is supplied to the bead mill disperser (grinding chamber in the bead mill disperser) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of productivity, 3 to 500 kg / Min is preferred, and 10 to 100 kg / min is more preferred.
  • a dispersion process using a bead mill is performed by using a known bead mill disperser.
  • the bead mill disperser include an ultra visco mill, an agitator mill, a super apex mill, an ultra apex mill, a dyno mill, a fine mill, an annular gap type mill, an MSC mill, and the like, and can be preferably used.
  • the bead separation method includes a centrifugal separation method, a screen method, and a slit method. When using beads of 0.1 mm or less, the centrifugal separation method is preferable.
  • the rotor for moving the beads and the separator must be driven separately from the viewpoint of bead separation.
  • screenless devices such as NPM-Pilot manufactured by Shinmaru Enterprises, Eco-Mill manufactured by Asada Tekko, and dual apex mill manufactured by Kotobuki Kogyo are preferred because they can avoid clogging.
  • a crushing chamber In the bead mill disperser, a crushing chamber is provided.
  • a rotor is usually provided in the grinding chamber.
  • the rotor has, for example, a disk shape, a rod shape, or a blade shape, and is connected to a rotation shaft that is rotationally driven by a driving device. For this reason, the rotor is provided so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotation shaft.
  • a protrusion may be formed near the end of the rotor so that the beads can be efficiently stirred by the rotation of the rotor.
  • the grinding chamber is filled with beads.
  • the kind of bead is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include glass beads, alumina beads, zirconia silicate beads, and zirconia beads.
  • the diameter of the bead is not particularly limited, but is usually 3 mm or less, and is preferably 1 mm or less, more preferably 0.3 mm or less, and even more preferably 0.05 mm or less from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 0.01 mm or more in many cases.
  • the diameter of the beads is an average value. Specifically, it is a value obtained by measuring the diameters of arbitrary 100 beads and arithmetically averaging them. In addition, when a bead is not perfect circle shape, it measures by making a major axis into a diameter.
  • the filling rate of beads in the grinding chamber is not particularly limited, but is preferably 40% by volume or more, more preferably 50% by volume or more, and still more preferably 60% by volume or more.
  • As an upper limit 98 volume% or less is preferable, 95 volume% or less is more preferable, and 90 volume% or less is still more preferable.
  • the filling rate is obtained by calculating the filling volume of the beads by dividing the weight of the beads by the bulk density of the beads and dividing the filling volume by the volume of the grinding chamber.
  • the pigment is dispersed by the rotor and beads. That is, the beads are agitated by the rotation of the rotor.
  • the stirred beads give a shearing force to the pigment. By this shearing force, the secondary particles of the pigment are solved and become primary particles. Further, since these pigments are stirred by beads, they are uniformly dispersed in a solvent such as an organic solvent.
  • the peripheral speed of the rotor during rotation of the rotor is not particularly limited, and is usually preferably 0.1 m / second or more, more preferably 1 m / second or more, and further preferably 5 m / second or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is often 15 m / second or less.
  • the circumferential speed of the rotor refers to the speed of the outer edge of the rotor.
  • the separator is also rotated in the same manner as the rotor to separate the pigment and the beads.
  • the peripheral speed of the separator is not particularly limited, and is usually preferably 0.1 m / second or more, more preferably 1 m / second or more, and further preferably 5 m / second or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is often 15 m / second or less.
  • the peripheral speed of the separator refers to the speed of the outer edge portion of the separator.
  • the treatment time of the dispersion treatment is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, 1 to 10 hours are preferable and 5 to 9.0 hours are more preferable when the amount of the treatment liquid charged is 15 kg. Although the length of the treatment time is not strict, it is preferable to increase the treatment time in proportion to the liquid amount.
  • the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in the grinding chamber can be adjusted by arranging piping around the grinding chamber and flowing the refrigerant in the piping.
  • the pigment dissolved in the grinding chamber is separated from the beads by a filter and collected.
  • a separator rotates, a pigment and a bead are isolate
  • the average particle size (that is, the average particle size of the pigment in the pigment dispersion) of the pigment (fine powder pigment) that has been subjected to the above-described dispersion treatment is not particularly limited, and varies depending on the primary particle size of the pigment used. From the viewpoint of more excellent effects of the present invention, it is preferably in the range of (primary particle diameter of pigment) or more (primary particle diameter of pigment ⁇ 10 times) or less, (primary particle diameter of pigment) or more (primary particle diameter of pigment). (Particle diameter ⁇ 6 times) or less is more preferable.
  • a dynamic light scattering method FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) power spectrum method) is known. More specifically, D90 calculated by Microtrac EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso) is defined as the average particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the primary particle diameter of the pigment used in the present invention is preferably less than 55 nm. In the initial stage of the dispersion treatment, the surface area of the pigment particles involved in the adsorption / desorption of the dispersant is increased, and the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Furthermore, 50 nm or less is more preferable, and 40 nm or less is still more preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is often 5 nm or more.
  • the primary particle diameter of the pigment is an average value, and the primary particle diameters of arbitrary 400 pigments are measured with an electron microscope, and they are arithmetically averaged. In addition, when a pigment is not a perfect circle shape, a circle equivalent diameter is used.
  • the equivalent circle diameter means the diameter of a circle corresponding to the same area as the area (projected area) of the observed two-dimensional image of the pigment.
  • inorganic pigments include metal compounds such as metal oxides and metal complex salts. Specific examples include metal oxides such as iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper, titanium, magnesium, chromium, zinc, and antimony, and composite oxides of the above metals.
  • Examples of the organic pigment include the following.
  • Pigment Orange 2 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. , C. I.
  • a black pigment is preferably used as the pigment.
  • Various known black pigments can be used as the black pigment.
  • tungsten oxide compounds such as carbon black, titanium black, titanium oxide, tungsten oxide, and cesium tungsten oxide, metal borides, iron oxide, manganese oxide, graphite, titanium carbide Zirconium carbide, zirconium boride, boron carbide, and silicon boride are preferable, carbon black or titanium black is more preferable, and titanium black is still more preferable.
  • Titanium black is black particles containing titanium atoms. Preferred is low-order titanium oxide or titanium oxynitride.
  • the surface of titanium black can be modified as necessary for the purpose of improving dispersibility and suppressing aggregation. Specifically, the surface of titanium black can be coated with silicon oxide, titanium oxide, germanium oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, or zirconium oxide. Further, the surface of titanium black can be treated with a water-repellent substance as disclosed in JP-A-2007-302836. Titanium black is typically particulate and preferably has a small primary particle size for each particle.
  • the specific surface area of titanium black is not particularly limited, but the value measured by the BET method is usually about 5 m 2 / g to 150 m 2 / g, and preferably 20 m 2 / g to 120 m 2 / g.
  • Examples of commercially available titanium black include titanium black 10S, 12S, 13R, 13M, 13M-C, 13R, 13R-N, 13M-T (trade names: above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation), and T For example, Rack D (trade name: manufactured by Ako Kasei Co., Ltd.).
  • titanium black is contained as a dispersion in the composition, and the content ratio (Si / Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the dispersion is 0.05 or more in terms of mass.
  • the to-be-dispersed bodies include both those in which titanium black is in the state of primary particles and those in the state of aggregates (secondary particles).
  • the content ratio (Si / Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the dispersion is 0.5 or less, which makes it easier to produce a pigment dispersion using the dispersion. Is preferably 0.5.
  • the residue has less residue and the light shielding ability is excellent. It is more preferably 5 or less, and further preferably 0.07 or more and 0.4 or less.
  • the following means can be used. First, a mixture is obtained by dispersing titanium oxide and silica particles using a disperser, and the mixture is subjected to reduction treatment at a high temperature (for example, 850 to 1000 ° C.) to thereby mainly contain titanium black particles. Thus, a dispersion containing Si and Ti can be obtained.
  • Titanium black whose Si / Ti is adjusted to 0.05 or more, for example, is produced by the method described in paragraph numbers [0005] and paragraph numbers [0016] to [0021] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-266045. it can.
  • Si-containing material such as silica
  • examples of silica that can be used include precipitated silica, fumed silica, colloidal silica, and synthetic silica. These may be appropriately selected and used. Titanium black may use only 1 type and may use 2 or more types.
  • the content of the pigment in the precursor composition is not particularly limited, it is preferably 5 to 50% by mass and preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to the total mass of the precursor composition in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. More preferred is 15 to 35% by mass.
  • a dispersing agent contributes to the dispersibility improvement of the pigment mentioned above.
  • the acid value of the dispersant is preferably from 30 to 100 mgKOH / g, and more preferably from 30 to 90 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the amount is within the above range, the amount of the unadsorbed dispersant can be further reduced, and the effects of the present invention can be advantageously obtained, and the effects of preheating (step 1) and heat treatment during dispersion (step 2) can be obtained. Together, foreign matter (aggregates such as pigment particles and unadsorbed dispersant) is less likely to occur over time.
  • a potentiometric titration method may be mentioned. That is, the dispersant is dissolved in a titration solvent (for example, 9: 1 mixed solvent of propylene glycol monomethyl ether and water), titrated with a 0.1 mol / L potassium hydroxide aqueous solution, and until the inflection point on the titration curve.
  • the acid value can be calculated from the titration amount.
  • the acid value of the dispersant can be calculated from, for example, the average content of acid groups in the dispersant.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the dispersant is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 4,000 or more and 300,000 or less, and 5,000 or more and 200,000 or less as a polystyrene conversion value by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). More preferably, it is 6,000 or more and 100,000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or more and 50,000 or less.
  • the GPC method uses HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), TSKgel SuperHZM-H, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperHZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm) as columns and THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent. ).
  • the dispersant a known pigment dispersant can be appropriately selected and used.
  • polymer compounds are preferable.
  • the dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamines or salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids or salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, modified poly (meth) acrylates, (meth) acrylic types. Copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine and the like.
  • the polymer compounds can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
  • the high molecular compound is adsorbed on the surface of the object to be dispersed such as a pigment and acts to prevent reaggregation of these. Therefore, the polymer compound is preferably a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, or a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface. On the other hand, by modifying the surface of the pigment, the adsorptivity of the polymer compound to these can be promoted.
  • the polymer compound preferably has a structural unit having a graft chain.
  • the polymer compound having a structural unit having such a graft chain is excellent in the dispersibility of the pigment and the dispersion stability after the lapse of time because the affinity with the solvent is improved by the graft chain.
  • the graft chain becomes longer, the steric repulsion effect becomes higher and the dispersibility of the pigment is improved.
  • the graft chain is too long, the adsorptive power of the polymer compound to the pigment is lowered and the dispersibility of the pigment tends to be lowered.
  • the graft chain preferably has a number of atoms excluding hydrogen atoms in the range of 40 to 10,000, more preferably a number of atoms excluding hydrogen atoms of 50 to 2000, and atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. More preferably, the number is from 60 to 500.
  • the graft chain means from the base of the main chain of the copolymer (the atom bonded to the main chain in a group branched from the main chain) to the end of the group branched from the main chain.
  • the graft chain preferably has a polymer structure.
  • a polymer structure include a poly (meth) acrylate structure (for example, a poly (meth) acrylic structure), a polyester structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide structure. And a polyether structure.
  • the graft chain is at least one selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure and a poly (meth) acrylate structure.
  • a graft chain having a seed is preferable, and a graft chain having at least one of a polyester structure and a polyether structure is more preferable.
  • the macromonomer having such a polymer structure as a graft chain is not particularly limited, but a macromonomer having a reactive double bond group is preferable.
  • AA-6 trade name, Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.
  • AA-10 Product name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.
  • AB-6 trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.
  • AS-6 trade name, produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.
  • AN-6 trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.
  • Co., Ltd. AW-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-714 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AY-707 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AY-714 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AK-5 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.
  • AA-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-10 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AB-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AS-6 (Trade name, Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AN-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), or Bremer PME-4000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation) is preferred.
  • the polymer compound (dispersant) preferably includes a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas (1) to (4) as a structural unit having a graft chain. More preferably, it includes a structural unit represented by any one of (2A), the following formula (3A), the following formula (3B), and the following (4).
  • W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH.
  • W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 are preferably oxygen atoms.
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of synthesis constraints. Further, a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group is still more preferable.
  • Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group, and the linking group is not particularly limited in structure.
  • Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 include the following (Y-1) to (Y-21) linking groups.
  • a and B mean binding sites with the left end group and the right end group in formulas (1) to (4), respectively.
  • a linking group of (Y-2) or (Y-13) is preferred from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 each independently represent a monovalent organic group.
  • the type of the organic group is not particularly limited, and specific examples include an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, and an amino group. Is mentioned.
  • the organic group represented by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 those having a steric repulsion effect are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment, and each independently has 5 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl groups or alkoxy groups are preferable, and branched alkyl groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, cyclic alkyl groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, or alkoxy groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms are more preferable.
  • the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • n, m, p, and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 500.
  • j and k each independently represent an integer of 2 to 8.
  • J and k in the formulas (1) and (2) are preferably integers of 4 to 6, and more preferably 5, from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment.
  • R 3 represents a branched or straight chain alkylene group, preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. When p is 2 to 500, a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different from each other.
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and the type of the monovalent organic group is not particularly limited. R 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, A linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is still more preferable.
  • a plurality of X 5 and R 4 present in the graft copolymer may be the same or different from each other.
  • the polymer compound may have a structural unit having a graft chain, which has two or more different structures. That is, the polymer compound molecule may contain structural units represented by formulas (1) to (4) having different structures, and n, m in formulas (1) to (4). , P, and q each represent an integer of 2 or more, in formula (1) and formula (2), j and k may contain structures different from each other in the side chain. In the formula (4), a plurality of R 3 , R 4 and X 5 present in the molecule may be the same or different from each other.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (1) is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (1A) from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment.
  • the structural unit represented by following formula (2A) is preferable from a viewpoint of the dispersion stability of a pigment.
  • X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n are as defined X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n in Formula (1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m are as defined X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m in the formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (3) is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (3A) or (3B) from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment.
  • X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p are as defined X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p in formula (3), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the polymer compound has a structural unit represented by the formula (1A) as a structural unit having a graft chain.
  • the structural unit having a graft chain (for example, the structural unit represented by the above formulas (1) to (4)) is 2 to 90 relative to the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass. % Is preferably included, and more preferably in the range of 5 to 30%. When the structural unit having a graft chain is contained within this range, the dispersibility of the pigment (particularly titanium black) is high.
  • the polymer compound preferably has a hydrophobic structural unit different from the structural unit having a graft chain (that is, not corresponding to the structural unit having a graft chain).
  • the hydrophobic structural unit is a structural unit having no acid group (for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group).
  • the hydrophobic structural unit is preferably a structural unit derived from (corresponding to) a compound (monomer) having a ClogP value of 1.2 or more, more preferably derived from a compound having a ClogP value of 1.2 to 8. A structural unit. Thereby, the effect of this invention can be expressed more reliably.
  • ClogP values can be obtained from Daylight Chemical Information System, Inc. It is a value calculated by the program “CLOGP” available from This program provides the value of “computation logP” calculated by Hansch, Leo's fragment approach (see below). The fragment approach is based on the chemical structure of a compound, which divides the chemical structure into substructures (fragments) and estimates the logP value of the compound by summing the logP contributions assigned to that fragment. Details thereof are described in the following documents. In the present invention, the ClogP value calculated by the program CLOGP v4.82 is used. A. J. et al. Leo, Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C.I. Hansch, P.A. G. Sammunens, J. et al. B.
  • logP means the common logarithm of the partition coefficient P (Partition Coefficient), and quantitatively determines how an organic compound is distributed in the equilibrium of a two-phase system of oil (generally 1-octanol) and water. It is a physical property value expressed as a numerical value, and is represented by the following formula.
  • logP log (Coil / Cwater)
  • Coil represents the molar concentration of the compound in the oil phase
  • Cwater represents the molar concentration of the compound in the aqueous phase.
  • the polymer compound preferably has one or more structural units selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (i) to (iii) as hydrophobic structural units.
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom), or An alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.) is represented.
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 2 and R 3 are more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • L is a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a divalent aliphatic group for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group
  • a divalent aromatic group for example, Arylene group and substituted arylene group
  • divalent heterocyclic group oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino group (—NR 31 —
  • R 31 includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl group (—CO—), or a combination thereof.
  • the divalent aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group may be an unsaturated aliphatic group or a saturated aliphatic group, but is preferably a saturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle.
  • Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group ( ⁇ O), a thioxo group ( ⁇ S), an imino group ( ⁇ NH), a substituted imino group ( ⁇ N—R 32 , where R 32 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, and heterocyclic group.
  • L is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure.
  • the oxyalkylene structure is preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure.
  • L may contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures.
  • the polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure.
  • the polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • Z is an aliphatic group (for example, an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, an unsaturated alkyl group, and a substituted unsaturated alkyl group), an aromatic group (for example, an aryl group and a substituted aryl group), or The group which combined these is mentioned.
  • Each of the above groups includes a heterocyclic group, an oxygen atom (—O—), a sulfur atom (—S—), an imino group (—NH—), a substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, wherein R 31 represents Represents an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), or may contain a carbonyl group (—CO—).
  • the aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group includes a ring assembly hydrocarbon group and a bridged cyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the ring assembly hydrocarbon group include a bicyclohexyl group, a perhydronaphthalenyl group, a biphenyl group, and 4- Examples thereof include a cyclohexylphenyl group.
  • the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring includes two rings such as pinane, bornane, norpinane, norbornane, bicyclooctane ring (bicyclo [2.2.2] octane ring, bicyclo [3.2.1] octane ring, etc.)
  • a tricyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a formula hydrocarbon ring, homobredan, adamantane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane, and tricyclo [4.3.1.1 2,5 ] undecane ring, And tetracyclo [4.4.0.1 2,5 .
  • the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring includes a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring, such as perhydronaphthalene (decalin), perhydroanthracene, perhydrophenanthrene, perhydroacenaphthene, perhydrofluorene, perhydroindene, and A condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed, such as a perhydrophenalene ring, is also included.
  • a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring such as perhydronaphthalene (decalin), perhydroanthracene, perhydrophenanthrene, perhydroacenaphthene, perhydrofluorene, perhydroindene, and A condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed, such as a perhydrophenalene ring, is also included.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aliphatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
  • the carbon number of the aromatic group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-15, and still more preferably 6-10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aromatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
  • the heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle. Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring. Moreover, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group ( ⁇ O), a thioxo group ( ⁇ S), an imino group ( ⁇ NH), a substituted imino group ( ⁇ N—R 32 , where R 32 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, and heterocyclic group. However, the heterocyclic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
  • R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms ( For example, it represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), Z, or -LZ.
  • L and Z are as defined above.
  • R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L is a single bond, an alkylene group, or an oxyalkylene structure.
  • a compound in which X is an oxygen atom or an imino group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group is preferable.
  • R 1 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • L is an alkylene group
  • Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group. Is preferred.
  • R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group, or an aromatic group. Certain compounds are preferred.
  • Representative compounds represented by the general formulas (i) to (iii) include radical polymerizable compounds selected from acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrenes, and the like.
  • radical polymerizable compounds selected from acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrenes, and the like.
  • the compounds described in paragraphs 0089 to 0093 of JP2013-249417A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in this specification. Incorporated.
  • the hydrophobic structural unit is preferably contained in a range of 10 to 90%, more preferably in a range of 20 to 80% with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass. When the content is in the above range, sufficient pattern formation can be obtained.
  • the polymer compound may have a functional group that can form an interaction with a pigment (particularly titanium black).
  • the polymer compound preferably further has a structural unit having a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment.
  • the functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment include an acid group, a basic group, a coordination group, and a reactive functional group.
  • the polymer compound has an acid group, a basic group, a coordinating group, or a reactive functional group
  • the structural unit having an acid group, the structural unit having a basic group, or a coordinating group respectively. It is preferable to have a structural unit having or a structural unit having reactivity.
  • a high molecular compound has a structural unit which has an acid group
  • the acid group in the structural unit having an acid group easily interacts with the pigment, the polymer compound stably disperses the pigment, and the viscosity of the polymer compound that disperses the pigment is low. It is presumed that the compound itself is also easily dispersed stably.
  • the structural unit having an alkali-soluble group as an acid group may be the same structural unit as the above-described structural unit having a graft chain or a different structural unit. Is a structural unit different from the hydrophobic structural unit described above (that is, does not correspond to the hydrophobic structural unit described above).
  • the acid group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment examples include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and At least one of phosphoric acid groups is preferable, and a carboxylic acid group is more preferable in terms of good adsorbing power to the pigment and high dispersibility of the pigment. That is, the polymer compound preferably further has a structural unit having at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
  • the polymer compound may have one or more structural units having an acid group.
  • the polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit having an acid group, but when it is contained, the content of the structural unit having an acid group is calculated in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound. 5 to 80% is preferable, and 10 to 60% is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing damage of image strength due to alkali development.
  • Examples of the basic group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment include a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, a tertiary amino group, a heterocyclic ring containing an N atom, and an amide group. Tertiary amino groups are preferred because they have good adsorption power to the pigment and high dispersibility of the pigment.
  • the polymer compound can have one or more of these basic groups.
  • the polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit having a basic group, but when it is contained, the content of the structural unit having a basic group is calculated by mass conversion to the total mass of the polymer compound. On the other hand, 0.01 to 50% is preferable, and 0.01 to 30% is more preferable from the viewpoint of inhibiting the development inhibition.
  • Examples of the coordinating group which is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment, and the reactive functional group include acetylacetoxy group, trialkoxysilyl group, isocyanate group, acid anhydride, and acid chloride Etc. Of these, an acetylacetoxy group is preferred because it has a good adsorptive power to the pigment and has a high dispersibility of the pigment.
  • the polymer compound may have one or more of these groups.
  • the polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit having a coordinating group or a structural unit having a reactive functional group, but when it is contained, the content of these structural units is: In terms of mass, it is preferably 10 to 80% or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound, and more preferably 20 to 60% from the viewpoint of inhibiting developability inhibition.
  • the polymer compound has a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment in addition to the graft chain
  • the polymer compound was selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (iv) to (vi) It is preferable to have one or more structural units.
  • R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom), or An alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.) is represented.
  • R 11 , R 12 and R 13 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and each independently represents a hydrogen atom or A methyl group is more preferred.
  • R 12 and R 13 are each more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 1 in the general formula (iv) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • Y in the general formula (v) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a divalent aliphatic group for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group
  • a divalent aromatic group for example, Arylene group and substituted arylene group
  • divalent heterocyclic group oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino bond (—NR 31 ′ —)
  • R 31 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), or a combination thereof.
  • the divalent aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle.
  • One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group ( ⁇ O), a thioxo group ( ⁇ S), an imino group ( ⁇ NH), a substituted imino group ( ⁇ N—R 32 , where R 32 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, and heterocyclic group.
  • L 1 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure.
  • the oxyalkylene structure is preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure.
  • L 1 may also contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures.
  • the polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure.
  • the polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • Z 1 represents a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment other than the graft chain, and is preferably a carboxylic acid group or a tertiary amino group. More preferably, it is a carboxylic acid group.
  • R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), an alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. group (e.g., methyl group, ethyl group, and propyl group), - represents a Z 1, or -L 1 -Z 1.
  • L 1 and Z 1 are the same meaning as L 1 and Z 1 in the above, it is the preferable examples.
  • R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 1 is a divalent alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure.
  • a compound in which X is an oxygen atom or imino group and Z is a carboxylic acid group is preferred as a linking group.
  • R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • L 1 is an alkylene group
  • Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group
  • Y is methine. Compounds that are groups are preferred.
  • R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L is a single bond or an alkylene group, and Z A compound in which is a carboxylic acid group is preferred.
  • monomers represented by general formula (iv) to general formula (vi).
  • monomers include methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule (for example, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate) and succinic anhydride.
  • a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule with phthalic anhydride a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and tetrahydroxyphthalic anhydride , A reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and trimellitic anhydride, a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and pyromellitic anhydride, Acrylic acid, acrylic acid dimer, acrylic acid oligomer, maleic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, vinylphenol, and 4-hydroxy Phenyl methacrylamide.
  • the content of the structural unit having a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment is preferably 0.05 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment. 0 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 10 to 70% by mass is still more preferable.
  • the polymer compound has a structural unit having a graft chain, a hydrophobic structural unit, and a functional group capable of interacting with a pigment, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • You may further have other structural units (for example, a structural unit which has a functional group etc. which have affinity with the dispersion medium used for a dispersion) different from the structural unit which has various functions.
  • Examples of such other structural units include structural units derived from radical polymerizable compounds selected from acrylonitriles and methacrylonitriles.
  • the polymer compound may contain one or more of these other structural units, and its content is preferably 0 to 80% based on the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass, 10 to 60% is more preferable.
  • the high molecular compound X represented by general formula (X) is mentioned.
  • each group in the general formula (X) will be described in detail.
  • the substituent A 1 of the polymer compound X can interact with the pigment, the polymer compound X can strongly interact with the pigment by having n (1 to 9) substituents A 1. .
  • m polymer chains P 1 of the polymer compound X function as steric repulsion groups, and by having m, the polymer can exhibit uniform steric repulsive force and uniformly disperse the pigment.
  • a 1 is an acid group, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a phenol group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an alkyleneoxy chain.
  • Adsorption ability for pigments such as imide groups, imide groups, alkyloxycarbonyl groups, alkylaminocarbonyl groups, carboxylate groups, sulfonamido groups, alkoxysilyl groups, epoxy groups, isocyanate groups, hydroxyl groups, or heterocyclic groups Represents a functional group possessed.
  • the site having the ability to adsorb to the pigment (the above functional group) will be described as an “adsorption site” as appropriate.
  • two or more adsorption sites may be included.
  • a chain saturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
  • Examples include an embodiment in which the group A 1 is formed, and an embodiment in which two or more adsorption sites are bonded via a chain saturated hydrocarbon group to form a monovalent substituent A 1 is preferable.
  • adsorption sites themselves constitute a monovalent substituent adsorption sites themselves may also be a monovalent substituent represented by A 1.
  • the adsorption site constituting A 1 will be described below.
  • the “acid group” for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a monosulfate group, a phosphoric acid group, a monophosphate group, a phosphonic acid group, a phosphinic acid group, or a boric acid group is preferable.
  • a sulfonic acid group, a monosulfate group, a phosphoric acid group, a monophosphate group, a phosphonic acid group, or a phosphinic acid group is more preferable, and a carboxylic acid group is still more preferable.
  • urea group examples include —NR 15 CONR 16 R 17 (wherein R 15 , R 16 , and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or 6 or more carbon atoms).
  • an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is preferred, and —NR 15 CONHR 17 (wherein R 15 and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, An aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is more preferable, and —NHCONHR 17 (where R 17 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 6 carbon atoms). The above aryl group or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • Examples of the “urethane group” include —NHCOOR 18 , —NR 19 COOR 20 , —OCONHR 21 , and —OCONR 22 R 23 (where R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 and R 23 are each independently an alkyl group having 6 or more aryl group having a carbon number of 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or represents the number 7 or aralkyl group having a carbon.) are preferred, -NHCOOR 18, or, -OCONHR 21 (wherein R 18 and R 21 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms, and is more preferably —NHCOOR 18 , or, -OCONHR 21 (wherein each R 18, R 21 are independently an alkyl group having 6 or more aryl carbons of 1 to 10 carbon atoms , Or represents the number 7 or aralkyl
  • Examples of the “group having a coordinating oxygen atom” include an acetylacetonato group and a crown ether.
  • Examples of the “group having a basic nitrogen atom” include an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each Independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms), a guanidyl group represented by the following formula (a1), or the following formula:
  • the amidinyl group represented by (a2) is preferable.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
  • R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
  • an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Group, a phenyl group or a benzyl group a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, Represents a phenyl group or a benzyl group.
  • an amidinyl group represented by the formula (a2) [in the formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. ] Is more preferable.
  • an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, A phenyl group or a benzyl group), a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group; Or represents a benzyl group.
  • an amidinyl group represented by the formula (a2) [in the formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. ] Is more preferable.
  • the “alkyl group” may be linear or branched and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. An alkyl group having 10 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the “aryl group” is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the terminal preferably forms an alkyloxy group or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably an alkyloxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyleneoxy chain is not particularly limited as long as it has at least one alkyleneoxy group, but preferably comprises an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkyleneoxy group examples include —CH 2 CH 2 O— and —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O—.
  • the alkyl group moiety in the “alkyloxycarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group moiety in the “alkylaminocarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the “carboxylic acid group” include a group consisting of an ammonium salt of a carboxylic acid.
  • a hydrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen atom may be substituted with an alkyl group (such as a methyl group) or an acyl group (such as an acetyl group or a trifluoroacetyl group).
  • heterocyclic group examples include thiophene group, furan group, xanthene group, pyrrole group, pyrroline group, pyrrolidine group, dioxolane group, pyrazole group, pyrazoline group, pyrazolidine group, imidazole group, oxazole group, thiazole group, oxalate group.
  • examples include imidazolone group, benzothiazole group, hydantoin group, indole group, quinoline group, carbazole group, acridine group, acridone group, and anthraquinone group.
  • Examples of the “imide group” include imide groups such as a succinimide group, a phthalimide group, and a naphthalimide group.
  • the “heterocyclic group” and the “imide group” may further have a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, Hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxylic acid group, sulfonamido group, N-sulfonylamido group, acetoxy group and other C1-C6 acyloxy group, C1-C20 alkoxy group, halogen atom, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl And a C2-C7 alkoxycarbonyl group such as a cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, and a carbonate group such as t-butyl carbonate.
  • alkoxysilyl group may be any of monoalkoxysilyl group, dialkoxysilyl group and trialkoxysilyl group, but trialkoxysilyl group is preferable, for example, trimethoxysilyl group and triethoxysilyl group Etc.
  • epoxy group include a substituted or unsubstituted oxiranyl group (ethylene oxide group).
  • a 1 is preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group of pKa5 or higher, and more preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group of pKa5 to 14.
  • pKa has the definition described in Chemical Handbook (II) (4th revised edition, 1993, edited by The Chemical Society of Japan, Maruzen Co., Ltd.).
  • the functional group having a pKa of 5 or more includes a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a phenol group, a urea group, a urethane group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, and an alkylaminocarbonyl group.
  • a group having an alkyleneoxy chain, an imide group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonamide group, a hydroxyl group, and a heterocyclic group include, for example, a phenol group (about pKa 8 to 10), an alkyl group (about pKa 46 to 53), an aryl group (about pKa 40 to 43), a urea group (pKa 12 to 14).
  • a 1 has an acid group, a phenol group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a group having an alkyleneoxy chain, a hydroxyl group, a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group, and a coordinating oxygen atom.
  • a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups is preferred.
  • R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • n R 2 may be the same or different.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by R 2 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 20 A group consisting of a single sulfur atom is included, and it may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
  • R 2 is a single bond or 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 0 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 oxygen atoms, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms.
  • a divalent linking group consisting of R 2 includes a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group (having 3 to 20 carbon atoms). Selected from the group consisting of an aromatic group (preferably having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenylene group), a thioether bond, an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a nitrogen atom, and a carbonyl group.
  • a group or a combination of two or more of these from the group consisting of a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group, an aromatic group, a thioether bond, an ester bond, an ether bond, and an amide bond.
  • a group selected or a combination of two or more of these is more preferable, and a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a thioether bond, an ester bond, an ether bond, and an amide
  • a group selected from the group consisting of a bond, or a group obtained by combining two or more of these is particularly preferable.
  • the divalent linking group represented by R 2 has a substituent
  • examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, and an amino group.
  • R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group.
  • m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
  • Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and A group consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms is included, which may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
  • the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 is preferably a group represented by any one of the following general formulas.
  • L 3 represents a trivalent group.
  • T 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and three T 3 s may be the same or different from each other.
  • L 4 represents a tetravalent group.
  • T 4 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the four T 4 s may be the same or different from each other.
  • L 5 represents a pentavalent group.
  • T 5 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and five T 5 s may be the same or different from each other.
  • L 6 represents a hexavalent group.
  • T 6 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and six T 6 s may be the same or different from each other.
  • Specific examples (specific examples (1) to (17)) of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 are shown below. However, it is not limited to these.
  • m represents a positive number of 8 or less. m is preferably 0.5 to 5, more preferably 1 to 4, and still more preferably 1 to 3. In the general formula (X), n represents 1 to 9. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, and still more preferably 3 to 6.
  • P 1 represents a polymer chain and can be selected from known polymers according to the purpose.
  • the m P 1 may be the same or different.
  • the polymers polymers or copolymers of vinyl monomers, ester polymers, ether polymers, urethane polymers, amide polymers, epoxy polymers, silicone polymers, and modified products thereof, or the copolymer of these Copolymer [For example, a polyether / polyurethane copolymer, a copolymer of a polyether / vinyl monomer polymer, etc. (any of a random copolymer, a block copolymer, and a graft copolymer may be used. )including.
  • the polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomers, the ester polymer, and the ether polymer that the polymer chain P 1 may have are each represented by the following general formula (L), (M), or (N). It is preferable to have a structure.
  • X 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • X 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and still more preferably a methyl group, from the viewpoint of synthesis constraints.
  • R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 10 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R 10 is an alkyl group
  • the alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms
  • a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is still more preferable.
  • the polymer chain may have two or more types of repeating units in which R 10 in the general formula (L) is different.
  • R 11 and R 12 represent a linear or branched alkylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 2 to 8, and still more preferably 3 to 6).
  • the polymer chain may have two or more kinds of repeating units in which R 11 or R 12 in each general formula is different.
  • k1, k2, and k3 each independently represents a number of 5 to 140.
  • the polymer chain P 1 preferably contains at least one repeating unit.
  • the number k of the repeating units of at least one repeating unit in the polymer chain P 1 is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 7 or more, from the viewpoint of exhibiting steric repulsion and improving dispersion stability. .
  • the number k of repeating units of at least one repeating unit is preferably 140 or less, and 130 Or less, more preferably 60 or less.
  • the polymer is preferably soluble in an organic solvent.
  • the affinity with the organic solvent is high, the affinity with the dispersion medium becomes strong.
  • limit especially as said vinyl monomer For example, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, vinyl monomers having an acid group, maleic acid diesters, fumaric acid diesters, itaconic acid diesters , (Meth) acrylamides, styrenes, vinyl ethers, vinyl ketones, olefins, maleimides, or (meth) acrylonitrile, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, or The vinyl monomer having an acid group is more preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid esters or crotonic acid esters are still more preferable.
  • Preferable examples of the vinyl monomer include paragraphs 0089 to 0094, 0096 and 0097 of JP-A-2007-277514 (paragraphs 0105 to 0117 and 0119 to 0120 in the corresponding US 2010/233595). And their contents are incorporated herein by reference.
  • vinyl monomers having a functional group such as a urethane group, a urea group, a sulfonamide group, a phenol group, and an imide group
  • a monomer having a urethane group or a urea group for example, it can be appropriately synthesized by utilizing an addition reaction between an isocyanate group and a hydroxyl group or an amino group. Specifically, it can be synthesized by an addition reaction between an isocyanate group-containing monomer and a compound containing one hydroxyl group or a compound containing one primary or secondary amino group.
  • the polymer compound represented by the following general formula (Y) is preferable.
  • a 2 has the same meaning as A 1 in the general formula (X), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same.
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the n R 4 s may be the same or different.
  • the m R 5 s may be the same or different.
  • the divalent linking group represented by R 4 or R 5 the same divalent linking groups as those represented by R 2 in the general formula (X) can be used, and preferred embodiments are also described. It is the same.
  • a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched and preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms)
  • a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group preferably having 3 to 20 carbon atoms
  • an aromatic group preferably having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenylene group
  • an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a nitrogen An atom, a carbonyl group, or a group in which two or more of these are combined is preferable
  • a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group, an aromatic group, an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, or these two A group in which two or more are combined is more preferable
  • a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, or a group in which two or more of these are combined is more preferable.
  • R 3 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
  • the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 3 may further have a substituent, and is exemplified as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 in the general formula (X).
  • m and n are synonymous with m and n in general formula (X), respectively, and a preferable aspect is also the same.
  • P 2 in formula (Y) has the same meaning as P 1 in the general formula (X), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same.
  • the m P 2 can be the same or different.
  • R 3 Specific example (1), (2), (10), (11), (16), or (17) above
  • R 4 a single bond, a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group, an aromatic group, an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a nitrogen atom, a carbonyl group, or a group in which two or more of these are combined
  • R 5 Single bond, ethylene group, propylene group, the following group (a), or the following group (b)
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • l represents 1 or 2.
  • P 2 Polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomer, ester polymer, ether polymer, urethane polymer, or modified products thereof m: 1 to 3 n: 3-6
  • the polymer compound represented by the following general formula (Z) is preferable from the viewpoint of the dispersion stability of the pigment.
  • R 6 represents a (m + n1 + n2) -valent linking group
  • R 7 to R 9 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a 3 represents a monovalent substituent having at least one acid group.
  • a 4 represents a monovalent substituent different from A 3 .
  • the n1 A 3 and R 7 may be the same or different from each other.
  • the n2 A 4 and R 8 may be the same or different from each other.
  • m is synonymous with m in the general formula (X), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • n1 represents 1 to 8
  • n2 represents 1 to 8
  • P 3 has the same meaning as P 2 in formula (Y), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same.
  • the m P 3 and R 9 may be the same or different.
  • the (m + n1 + n2) -valent linking group for R 6 is the same as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 in the general formula (X) or R 3 in the general formula (Y).
  • the preferred embodiment is the same.
  • the divalent linking group for R 7 to R 9 the same divalent linking groups as those represented by R 4 and R 5 in formula (Y) can be used, and preferred embodiments Is the same.
  • Specific examples and preferred examples of the acid group that the substituent A 3 may have include those similar to the specific examples and preferred examples described above for the acid group in formula (X).
  • the substituent A 3 is preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one acid group having a pKa smaller than 5 and is composed of a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphinic acid group.
  • a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group is more preferable, and a carboxylic acid group is still more preferable.
  • Specific examples and preferred examples of the monovalent substituent A 4 different from A 3 include those similar to the groups other than the acid group in the specific examples and preferred examples described above for A 1 in the general formula (X). Can be mentioned.
  • the substituent A 4 is more preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group having a pKa of 5 or more, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, and a phenol group.
  • the substituent A 3 is a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group having a pKa of less than 5, and the substituent A 4 has a functionality of pKa 5 or more.
  • a monovalent substituent having at least one group is preferable.
  • Substituent A 3 is a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphinic acid group
  • a 4 has a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a phenol group, a urea group, a urethane group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, or an alkyleneoxy chain.
  • the substituent A 3 is a monovalent substituent having a carboxylic acid group
  • the substituent A 4 is an alkyl group, an aryl group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, More preferably, it is a urea group or a urethane group.
  • pigments from the viewpoint that the adsorption of alkyl group substituents A 3 is good, the substituent A 3 is a carboxylic acid group, and the substituent A 4 is particularly preferably an alkyl group.
  • dispersant examples include, for example, “Disperbyk-161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170, 190 (trade name, polymer copolymer)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, and “manufactured by EFKA” EFKA 4047, 4050, 4010, 4165 (trade name, polyurethane type), EFKA 4330, 4340 (trade name, block copolymer) ”and the like.
  • EFKA EFKA 4047, 4050, 4010, 4165 (trade name, polyurethane type), EFKA 4330, 4340 (trade name, block copolymer) ”and the like.
  • dispersant reference can be made to the polymer compounds described in paragraphs 0127 to 0129 of JP2013-249417A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the graft copolymer described in JP-A 2010-106268, paragraphs 0037 to 0115 (corresponding to columns 0075 to 0133 in US2011 / 0124824) can be used, and the contents thereof can be used. Embedded in the book. In addition to the above, it has a side chain structure in which acidic groups in paragraphs 0028 to 0084 (corresponding to columns 0075 to 0133 of US 2011/0279759) of JP 2011-153283 A are bonded via a linking group. Polymeric compounds containing components can be used, the contents of which can be incorporated and incorporated herein.
  • a dispersing agent may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the content of the dispersant in the precursor composition is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, and preferably 1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Is more preferable, and 1 to 15% by mass is still more preferable.
  • the ratio (D / P ratio) between the mass of the dispersant (D) and the mass of the pigment (P) in the precursor composition is excellent in the viscosity with time and solid content stability of the dispersion, and at the same time, the coating film In view of improving the in-plane uniformity of the film thickness, it is preferably 0.1 to 0.45, more preferably 0.12 to 0.4, and still more preferably 0.14 to 0.35.
  • the precursor composition contains an organic solvent.
  • organic solvents include, for example, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexane, ethyl acetate, ethylene dichloride, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether.
  • Acetylacetone, cyclohexanone, diacetone alcohol ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoisopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropanol, methoxymethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, ⁇ -butyrolactone, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate , Methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate, but are not limited thereto.
  • An organic solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the precursor composition is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 50 to 95% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Preferably, 55 to 90% by mass is more preferable.
  • the precursor composition may contain other additives as necessary within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention.
  • additives include, for example, anti-drying agents (wetting agents), anti-fading agents, emulsion stabilizers, penetration enhancers, ultraviolet absorbers, preservatives, anti-fungal agents, pH adjusters, surface tension adjusters, Known additives such as foaming agents, viscosity modifiers, rust inhibitors, chelating agents, antioxidants, adhesion aids, surfactants, resin coating agents, and pigment derivatives can be used.
  • the pigment dispersion produced by the above procedure includes a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent.
  • the preferable range of the average particle diameter of the pigment in the pigment dispersion is as described above.
  • Each of the main components such as a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin may be added to the obtained pigment dispersion to form a curable composition.
  • a curable composition it can apply to various uses, for example, when a black pigment is used as a pigment, it can apply to a light shielding film formation use.
  • the cured film formed from the said curable composition can be applied to various uses, for example, a color filter etc. are mentioned.
  • the said cured film can be applied to various apparatuses, for example, a solid-state image sensor, an image display apparatus, etc. are mentioned.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization initiator.
  • a polymerization initiator There is no restriction
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity from the ultraviolet region to the visible light region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some active radicals by generating some action with the photoexcited sensitizer.
  • the initiator which starts cationic polymerization according to the kind of monomer may be sufficient.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, and oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds such as, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones.
  • Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums
  • a compound selected from the group consisting of a compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound and a derivative thereof, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex and a salt thereof, a halomethyloxadiazole compound, and a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound preferable.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, or acetophenone compounds are more preferable, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -More preferred are aminoketone compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers or benzophenone compounds.
  • a curable composition when used for the production of a light-shielding film for a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It's important to. From such a viewpoint, an oxime compound is preferable as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • an oxime compound is preferable as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, considering these points, it is preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
  • oxime compound can improve the color transfer.
  • paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds are also preferable. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 are also included. Examples of the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator include IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF).
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiators examples include commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379EG (trade names: all manufactured by BASF).
  • examples of the aminoacetophenone-based initiator include compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 in which an absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source such as 365 nm or 405 nm.
  • examples of the acylphosphine initiator include IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF), which are commercially available products.
  • an oxime compound (oxime initiator) is preferable.
  • Oxime compounds are preferred because they are highly sensitive, have high polymerization efficiency, can be cured regardless of the color material concentration, and can be easily designed with a high color material concentration.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound include a compound described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, a compound described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and a compound described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
  • Preferred embodiments of the oxime compound include, for example, 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3 -One, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, and And 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
  • J.H. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660) J.M. C.
  • oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N position, and compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety
  • a compound described in JP 2010-15025 A and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety a ketoxime compound described in International Publication No. 2009-131189, the triazine skeleton and the oxime skeleton are the same Examples thereof include compounds described in US Pat. No.
  • the oxime compound for example, paragraphs 0274 to 0275 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1).
  • the oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
  • R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • A represents a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
  • the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group.
  • these groups may have one or more substituents.
  • the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
  • the substituent examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A 2013-164471. Examples thereof include compound (C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
  • photopolymerization initiator a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can also be used.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or When an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms is represented and R 1 and R 2 are phenyl groups, the phenyl groups may be bonded to each other to form a fluorene group, and R 3 and R 4 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and X represents a direct bond or carbonyl Indicates a group.
  • R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 in Formula (1)
  • R 5 is -R 6, -OR 6 , —SR 6 , —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN
  • halogen R 6 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms
  • X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group.
  • R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group.
  • R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group.
  • R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • X is preferably a direct bond.
  • Specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (1) and formula (2) include, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0079 of JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
  • oxime compounds that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • the oxime compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 to 480 nm, and more preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably from 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is more preferable.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured by a known method.
  • the molar extinction coefficient is measured at a concentration of 0.01 g / L using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrphotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent. It is preferable. You may use a polymerization initiator in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the curable composition. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization initiator or two or more types of polymerization initiators. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group and having a boiling point of 100 ° C or higher at normal pressure.
  • the polymerizable compound preferably contains 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated groups, and is preferably a so-called polyfunctional polymerizable compound. Examples of the compound having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group and having a boiling point of 100 ° C.
  • polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, phenoxy Monofunctional acrylate or methacrylate such as ethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, penta Erythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl)
  • a polyfunctional alcohol such as ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerin or trimethylol ethane, after addition of ethylene
  • Japan Adhesion Association Vol. 20, No. 7, pages 300 to 308, which are introduced as photocurable monomers and oligomers, can also be used.
  • compounds obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to a polyfunctional alcohol described in JP-A-10-62986 as general formula (1) and general formula (2) together with specific examples thereof and then (meth) acrylated Can also be used.
  • dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and structures in which these acryloyl groups are linked to dipentaerythritol via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred.
  • These oligomer types can also be used.
  • urethane acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765, or JP-B-58 Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B Nos. -49860, 56-17654, 62-39417, and 62-39418 are also suitable.
  • addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are also suitable. It is.
  • urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (trade name, manufactured by Nippon Paper Chemicals Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (trade name, Nippon Kasei) Yakuhin Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, and AI-600 (trade name, manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group are also suitable.
  • Examples of commercially available products include TO-756, which is a carboxylic acid group-containing trifunctional acrylate manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd., and a carboxylic acid group-containing pentafunctional group. Examples thereof include TO-1382 which is an acrylate.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is more preferably a tetrafunctional or higher acrylate compound. Examples of the tetrafunctional or higher acrylate compound include KAYARD DPHA (trade name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • a polymeric compound may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the combination mode can be appropriately set according to the physical properties required for the composition.
  • a suitable combination mode of the polymerizable compound for example, a mode in which two or more polymerizable compounds selected from the polyfunctional acrylate compounds described above are combined, and an example thereof is dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate. And a combination of pentaerythritol triacrylate.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 3 to 55% by mass, more preferably 10 to 50% by mass, based on the total solid content in the curable composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent.
  • a silane coupling agent is a compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups in the molecule.
  • a hydrolyzable group such as an alkoxy group is bonded to a silicon atom.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond by a hydrolysis reaction and / or a condensation reaction.
  • Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and an alkenyloxy group.
  • the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 or less, and more preferably 4 or less.
  • an alkoxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent preferably does not contain a fluorine atom and a silicon atom (excluding a silicon atom to which a hydrolyzable group is bonded).
  • Silicon atoms (excluding silicon atoms to which hydrolyzable groups are bonded), alkylene groups substituted with silicon atoms, linear alkyl groups having 8 or more carbon atoms, and branched alkyl groups having 3 or more carbon atoms are It is desirable not to include.
  • the silane coupling agent preferably has a group represented by the following formula (Z). * Represents a bonding position.
  • R Z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition thereof is as described above.
  • the silane coupling agent preferably has one or more curable functional groups selected from the group consisting of a (meth) acryloyloxy group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group.
  • the curable functional group may be directly bonded to the silicon atom, or may be bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group.
  • a radically polymerizable group is also mentioned as a suitable aspect of the curable functional group contained in the said silane coupling agent.
  • the molecular weight of the silane coupling agent is not particularly limited, and is often 100 to 1000 from the viewpoint of handleability, and is preferably 270 or more and more preferably 270 to 1000 from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • silane coupling agent X represented by the formula (W).
  • R z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition is as described above.
  • R z2 represents a curable functional group, the definition is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
  • Lz represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Lz represents a divalent linking group
  • the divalent As the linking group an alkylene group optionally substituted with a halogen atom, an arylene group optionally halogen atoms substituted, -NR 12 -, - CONR 12 -, - CO -, - CO 2 -, SO 2 NR 12 -, - O -, - S -, - SO 2 -, or combinations thereof.
  • a group composed of a combination with one kind of group is preferable, an alkylene group which may be substituted by a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, —CO 2 —, —O—, —CO—, —CONR 12 —, or A group consisting of a combination of these groups is more preferred.
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyl-methyldimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-602 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyl-trimethoxy Silane (trade name KBM-603 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-602 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), ⁇ -aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (Trade name KBM-903 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), ⁇ -aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-903 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-602 manufactured by Shin
  • a silane coupling agent Y having at least a silicon atom, a nitrogen atom and a curable functional group in the molecule and having a hydrolyzable group bonded to the silicon atom is provided.
  • the silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one silicon atom in the molecule, and the silicon atom can be bonded to the following atoms or substituents.
  • the bondable atom or substituent includes a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkyl group and / or an amino group that can be substituted with an aryl group, silyl Group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group, and the like.
  • substituents further include an amino group, a halogen atom, a sulfonamide group, a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an alkyl group and / or an aryl group. It may be substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amide group, a urea group, an ammonium group, an alkylammonium group, a carboxylic acid group or a salt thereof, and a sulfo group or a salt thereof.
  • at least one hydrolyzable group is bonded to the silicon atom.
  • the definition of the hydrolyzable group is as described above.
  • the silane coupling agent Y may contain a group represented by the formula (Z).
  • the silane coupling agent Y has at least one nitrogen atom in the molecule, and the nitrogen atom is preferably present in the form of a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group, that is, the nitrogen atom is used as a substituent. It preferably has at least one organic group.
  • the amino group structure may exist in the molecule in the form of a partial structure of a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, or may exist as a substituted amino group such as aniline.
  • examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a combination thereof. These may further have a substituent.
  • substituents that can be introduced include a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a sulfonamide.
  • the nitrogen atom is couple
  • Preferred examples of the organic linking group include the above-described nitrogen atom and substituents that can be introduced into the organic group bonded thereto.
  • the definition of the curable functional group contained in the silane coupling agent Y is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
  • the silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one curable functional group in one molecule, but it is also possible to take an embodiment having two or more curable functional groups, sensitivity and stability. From this point, it is preferable to have 2 to 20 curable functional groups, more preferably 4 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the molecular weights of the silane coupling agent X and the silane coupling agent Y are not particularly limited, but include the above-described ranges (preferably 270 or more).
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content in the composition. More preferably, it is 0 to 6% by mass.
  • composition of the present invention may contain one silane coupling agent or two or more silane coupling agents.
  • silane coupling agents When a composition contains 2 or more types of silane coupling agents, the sum should just be in the said range.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain an alkali-soluble resin. It is preferable to use a linear organic polymer as the alkali-soluble resin. As such a linear organic polymer, a well-known thing can be used arbitrarily. Preferably, a linear organic polymer that is soluble or swellable in water or weak alkaline water is used to enable water development or weak alkaline water development.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is a linear organic polymer having at least one group that promotes alkali solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). Alkali-soluble resins are preferred.
  • a polyhydroxystyrene resin, a polysiloxane resin, an acrylic resin, an acrylamide resin, or an acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resin is preferable, and from the viewpoint of developing property control, an acrylic resin, Acrylamide resins or acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
  • groups that promote alkali solubility include carboxylic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, and phenolic hydroxyl groups, but are soluble in organic solvents and weakly alkaline. Those that can be developed with an aqueous solution are preferred, and carboxylic acid groups are more preferred. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • alkali-soluble resin examples include radical polymers having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-54-92723, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, ie, resins or acid anhydrides obtained by homopolymerizing or copolymerizing monomers having a carboxylic acid group Examples include a resin obtained by hydrolyzing, half-esterifying or half-amidating an acid anhydride unit, or an epoxy acrylate obtained by modifying an epoxy resin with an unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and an acid anhydride. .
  • radical polymers having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-54
  • Examples of the monomer having a carboxylic acid group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, and 4-carboxyl styrene.
  • Examples of the monomer having an acid anhydride include anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
  • acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain are also included.
  • those obtained by adding a cyclic acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group are useful.
  • the acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder polymer having an acid group described in European Patent Nos. 993966, 120204000, and 2001-318463 has an excellent balance of film strength and developability. It is preferable.
  • polyvinyl pyrrolidone or polyethylene oxide is useful as the water-soluble linear organic polymer.
  • a known radical polymerization method For the production of the alkali-soluble resin, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, and type of solvent when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and experimental conditions Can also be determined.
  • a polymer having a structural unit having a graft chain and a structural unit having an acid group (alkali-soluble group) as the alkali-soluble resin.
  • the definition of the structural unit which has a graft chain is synonymous with the structural unit which has the graft chain which the dispersing agent mentioned above has, and its suitable range is also the same.
  • the acid group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group, and at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group is preferable. Carboxylic acid groups are more preferred.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is preferably at least one structural unit selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (vii) to (ix).
  • R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number 1 to 6 alkyl groups (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.) are represented.
  • R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are more preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 21 and R 23 are each particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 2 in the general formula (vii) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • Y in the general formula (viii) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), and a divalent aromatic group (for example, arylene).
  • R 41 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), or a combination thereof.
  • the divalent aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle.
  • One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group ( ⁇ O), a thioxo group ( ⁇ S), an imino group ( ⁇ NH), a substituted imino group ( ⁇ N—R 42 , where R 42 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
  • L 2 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure.
  • the oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure.
  • L 2 may contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures.
  • the polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure.
  • the polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • Z 2 is an acid group, preferably a carboxylic acid group.
  • R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or an alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. group (e.g., methyl group, ethyl group, and propyl group), - represents a Z 2, or -L 2 -Z 2.
  • L 2 and Z 2 has the same meaning as L 2 and Z 2 in the above, and preferred examples are also the same.
  • R 24 , R 25 and R 26 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 2 is a divalent alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure.
  • a compound in which X 2 is an oxygen atom or an imino group and Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
  • R 21 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • L 2 is an alkylene group
  • Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group
  • Y is methine.
  • Compounds that are groups are preferred.
  • a compound in which R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
  • the alkali-soluble resin can be synthesized by a known method.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may have one or more structural units having an acid group.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group is preferably 5 to 95% in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the alkali-soluble resin, and is 10 to 90% from the viewpoint of suppressing image strength damage due to alkali development. More preferred.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass and more preferably 0.3 to 25% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. .
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent include water or an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexane, ethyl acetate, ethylene dichloride, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, acetylacetone.
  • Cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, diacetone alcohol ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoisopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropanol, methoxymethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol mono Chill ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, ⁇ -butyrolactone, ethyl acetate, Examples include butyl acetate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate.
  • a solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type. When two or more solvents are used in combination, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, It is preferably composed of two or more selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the amount of the solvent contained in the composition of the present invention is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, and more preferably 20 to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • an ultraviolet absorber examples include salicylate-based, benzophenone-based, benzotriazole-based, substituted acrylonitrile-based, and triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers.
  • compounds of paragraphs 0137 to 0142 corresponding to paragraphs 0251 to 0254 of US2012 / 0068292) of JP2012-068418A can be used, and the contents thereof can be incorporated and incorporated in the present specification. .
  • composition of the present invention may or may not contain an ultraviolet absorber, but when it is included, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.001 to 15% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition. 0.01 to 10% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1 to 5% by mass is still more preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain various surfactants from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the composition of the present invention can further improve the uniformity of coating thickness or the liquid-saving property because the liquid property (particularly fluidity) is further improved by containing a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781F (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • surfactants include, for example, surfactants described in paragraphs 0174 to 0177 of JP2013-249417A, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass and more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition.
  • composition of the present invention may further contain the following components.
  • sensitizers for example, sensitizers, co-sensitizers, crosslinking agents, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, polymerization inhibitors, plasticizers, diluents, sensitizers, adhesion promoters, and other auxiliaries
  • Well-known additives such as conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling accelerators, antioxidants, fragrances, surface tension adjusting agents, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • These components include, for example, paragraph numbers 0183 to 0228 of JP2012-003225A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No.
  • JP2008-250074A Paragraph numbers 0101 to 0102, paragraph numbers 0103 to 0104, paragraph numbers 0107 to 0109, paragraph numbers 0159 to 0184 in JP 2013-195480 A, and the like can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. .
  • the solid content concentration of the composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, and more preferably 15 to 40% by mass from the viewpoint of the balance between the thickness of the formed colored layer and the light shielding property.
  • the composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the various components described above by a known mixing method (for example, a stirrer, a homogenizer, a high-pressure emulsifier, a wet pulverizer, a wet disperser).
  • the composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects.
  • the filter is not particularly limited as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration.
  • a filter made of a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), a polyamide resin such as nylon, and a polyolefin resin (including high density and ultra high molecular weight) such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) can be used.
  • a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene)
  • a polyamide resin such as nylon
  • a polyolefin resin including high density and ultra high molecular weight
  • polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) polypropylene
  • the pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.1 to 7.0 ⁇ m, preferably 0.2 to 2.5 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 0.3 to 0.7 ⁇ m.
  • the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or twice or more.
  • the second and subsequent pore diameters are the same or larger than the pore diameter of the first filtering.
  • the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
  • the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
  • the pore size of the second filter is suitably about 0.2 to 10.0 ⁇ m, preferably 0.2 to 7.0 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.3 to 6.0 ⁇ m.
  • a cured film can be formed by using the composition described above.
  • the thickness of the cured film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.2 to 25 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.0 to 10 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the above thickness is an average thickness, and is a value obtained by measuring the thicknesses of five or more arbitrary points of the cured film and arithmetically averaging them.
  • substrate, forming a coating film, performing a hardening process with respect to a coating film, and manufacturing a cured film is mentioned.
  • the method of the curing treatment is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a photocuring treatment or a thermosetting treatment, and a photocuring treatment (particularly a curing treatment by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation) is preferable from the viewpoint of easy pattern formation.
  • the type of substrate used is not particularly limited.
  • various members in the solid-state imaging device for example, an infrared light cut filter, an outer peripheral portion of the solid-state imaging device, an outer peripheral portion of a wafer level lens, and The back surface of the solid-state imaging device is preferable.
  • a preferred embodiment in the case of producing a patterned cured film is a step of applying a composition of the present invention on a substrate by spin coating to form a composition layer (hereinafter referred to as “composition layer forming step” as appropriate).
  • composition layer forming step a step of applying a composition of the present invention on a substrate by spin coating to form a composition layer
  • exposure step a step of exposing the composition layer by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation
  • exposure step a cured film obtained by alkali development of the exposed composition layer.
  • development step a step of forming
  • composition of the present invention is applied onto a substrate directly or via another layer by spin coating to form a composition layer (composition layer forming step), and through a predetermined mask pattern. It is possible to produce a pattern-like cured film by exposing it to irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, curing only the coating film portion irradiated with light (exposure process), and developing with an alkaline developer (development process). .
  • exposure process curing only the coating film portion irradiated with light
  • development process developing with an alkaline developer
  • composition layer forming step a composition layer is formed by applying the composition of the present invention on a substrate.
  • the type of the substrate is not particularly limited, but when a cured film is disposed in the solid-state imaging device, for example, various members in the solid-state imaging device (for example, infrared light cut filter, outer peripheral portion of the solid-state imaging device, wafer level lens) And the like, and the like.
  • a coating method of the composition of the present invention on the substrate various coating methods such as spin coating, slit coating, ink jet method, spray coating, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing method are applied. Although spin coating is possible, spin coating is preferred.
  • the composition coated on the substrate is usually dried at 70 to 110 ° C. for about 2 to 4 minutes to form a composition layer.
  • the composition layer formed in the composition layer forming step is exposed by irradiating actinic rays or radiation through a mask, and only the coating film portion irradiated with the light is cured.
  • the exposure is preferably performed by irradiation of radiation, and as radiation that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line, h-line, and i-line are particularly preferable, and a high-pressure mercury lamp is preferable as a light source.
  • the irradiation intensity is preferably 5 ⁇ 1500mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ⁇ 1000mJ / cm 2.
  • development processing (development step) is performed to elute the light non-irradiated portion in the exposure step into the developer. Thereby, only the photocured part remains.
  • the developer it is desirable to use an organic alkali developer.
  • the development temperature is usually 20 to 30 ° C., and the development time is usually 20 to 90 seconds.
  • alkaline aqueous solution examples include an inorganic developer containing an alkaline compound such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium oxalate, and sodium metaoxalate, and aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, Diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, and 1,8-diazabicyclo- [ And an organic alkali developer containing an alkaline compound such as 5,4,0] -7-undecene.
  • an organic alkali developer containing an alkaline compound such as 5,4,0] -7-undecene.
  • the concentration of the alkaline compound is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.005 to 0.5% by mass.
  • An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol and ethanol, or a surfactant can also be added to the alkaline aqueous solution. In the case of using a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution, it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
  • the solid-state imaging device 2 includes a CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) sensor 3 as a solid-state imaging device, a circuit board 4 on which the CMOS sensor 3 is mounted, and a circuit board 4. And a ceramic substrate 5 made of ceramic.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • the solid-state image pickup device 2 is held on a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6 that cuts infrared light (IR) toward the CMOS sensor 3, a photographing lens 7, and a lens holder 8 that holds the photographing lens 7. And a holding cylinder 9 that holds the lens holder 8 movably.
  • a CCD (charge coupled device) sensor or an organic CMOS sensor may be provided instead of the CMOS sensor 3.
  • the ceramic substrate 5 has an opening 5 a into which the CMOS sensor 3 is inserted, has a frame shape, and surrounds the side surface of the CMOS sensor 3.
  • the circuit board 4 on which the CMOS sensor 3 is mounted is fixed to the ceramic substrate 5 with an adhesive (for example, an epoxy adhesive, the same applies hereinafter).
  • an adhesive for example, an epoxy adhesive, the same applies hereinafter.
  • Various circuit patterns are formed on the circuit board 4.
  • a reflection film that reflects infrared light is formed on a plate-like glass or blue glass, and the surface on which the reflection film is formed becomes the incident surface 6a.
  • the IR cut filter 6 is formed in a size slightly larger than the opening 5a, and is fixed to the ceramic substrate 5 with an adhesive so as to cover the opening 5a.
  • a CMOS sensor 3 is disposed behind the photographing lens 7 (downward in FIGS. 3 and 4), and an IR cut filter 6 is disposed between the photographing lens 7 and the CMOS sensor 3. The subject light enters the light receiving surface of the CMOS sensor 3 through the photographing lens 7 and the IR cut filter 6. At this time, the infrared light is cut by the IR cut filter 6.
  • the circuit board 4 is connected to a control unit provided in an electronic device (for example, a digital camera) on which the solid-state imaging device 2 is mounted, and power is supplied from the electronic device to the solid-state imaging device 2.
  • an electronic device for example, a digital camera
  • CMOS sensor 3 a large number of color pixels are two-dimensionally arranged on the light receiving surface, and each color pixel photoelectrically converts incident light and accumulates generated signal charges.
  • the light shielding film (light shielding layer) 11 described above is arranged over the entire circumference at the end of the incident surface 6 a of the IR cut filter 6, and infrared light with a light shielding film is provided.
  • a cut filter is formed.
  • the reflected light R1 emitted from the photographing lens 7 and reflected by the front surface (the upper surface in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the ceramic substrate 5 is incident on the CMOS sensor 3 after being repeatedly reflected or refracted in the device, and photographing.
  • the reflected light R ⁇ b> 2 reflected from the inner wall surface of the lens holder 8 emitted from the lens 7 enters the CMOS sensor 3, flare occurs in the captured image.
  • the light shielding film 11 shields harmful light such as reflected light R ⁇ b> 1 and R ⁇ b> 2 toward the CMOS sensor 3.
  • the light shielding film 11 is applied by, for example, a spin coating method and a spray coating method. 3 and 4, the thickness of the light shielding film 11 is exaggerated.
  • FIG. 5 shows a solid-state imaging device 20 according to the second embodiment.
  • the solid-state imaging device 20 includes a CMOS sensor 3, a circuit board 4, a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6, a photographing lens 7, a lens holder 8, and a holding cylinder 9.
  • the above-described light shielding film (light shielding layer) 21 is formed on the side end face of the IR cut filter 6 over the entire circumference.
  • the light shielding film 21 shields harmful light such as reflected light R ⁇ b> 3 directed toward the CMOS sensor 3.
  • FIG. 6 shows a solid-state imaging device 30 according to the third embodiment.
  • the solid-state imaging device 30 includes a CMOS sensor 3, a circuit board 4, a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6, a photographing lens 7, a lens holder 8, and a holding cylinder 9.
  • the light-shielding film (light-shielding layer) 31 described above is formed on the end and side end surfaces of the incident surface 6a of the IR cut filter 6 over the entire circumference. That is, the first and second embodiments are combined. In this embodiment, since the light shielding performance is higher than in the first and second embodiments, the occurrence of flare is reliably suppressed.
  • FIG. 7 shows a solid-state imaging device 40 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the solid-state imaging device 40 includes a CMOS sensor 3, a circuit board 4, a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6, a photographing lens 7, a lens holder 8, and a holding cylinder 9.
  • the light-shielding film (light-shielding layer) 31 described above is formed on the end and side end surfaces of the incident surface 6a of the IR cut filter 6 over the entire circumference.
  • a light shielding film (light shielding layer) 41 is formed on the inner wall surface of the ceramic substrate 5.
  • the cured film of this invention is applicable also to a color filter. That is, it can be used as a color filter having the cured film of the present invention.
  • the color filter can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels.
  • the color filter can be used by being disposed between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
  • the color filter can be preferably used for an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) element.
  • organic EL element a white organic EL element is preferable.
  • the organic EL element preferably has a tandem structure.
  • JP 2003-45676 A supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, “Frontier of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection”, Technical Information Association, 326-328 pages, 2008, etc.
  • Examples of the tandem structure of the organic EL element include a structure in which an organic EL layer is provided between a lower electrode having light reflectivity and an upper electrode having light transmittance on one surface of a substrate.
  • the lower electrode is preferably made of a material having a sufficient reflectance in the visible light wavelength region.
  • the organic EL layer preferably includes a plurality of light emitting layers and has a stacked structure (tandem structure) in which the plurality of light emitting layers are stacked.
  • the organic EL layer may include a red light emitting layer, a green light emitting layer, and a blue light emitting layer in the plurality of light emitting layers. And it is preferable that they have a some light emission auxiliary layer for light-emitting a light emitting layer together with a some light emitting layer.
  • the organic EL layer can have, for example, a stacked structure in which light emitting layers and light emitting auxiliary layers are alternately stacked.
  • an organic EL element having an organic EL layer having such a structure can emit white light.
  • the spectrum of white light emitted from the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 nm to 485 nm), the green region (530 nm to 580 nm), and the yellow region (580 nm to 620 nm).
  • those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm to 700 nm) are more preferable.
  • the film thickness of the colored pattern (colored pixel) in the color filter is preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.7 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 1.7 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • the cured film (color filter, light-shielding film, etc.) of the present invention can be used for an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • the display device For the definition of the display device or details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., issued in 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Book Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year).
  • the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the color filter in the present invention may be used for a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device.
  • the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
  • the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), and a super-twist neutral (STN).
  • IPS In Plane Switching
  • MVA Multi-domain Vertical Alignment
  • STN super-twist neutral
  • the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
  • COA Color-filter On Array
  • the required characteristics for the color filter require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the stripping solution resistance, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above. Sometimes. Since the color filter of the present invention is excellent in light resistance and the like, a COA type liquid crystal display device having high resolution and excellent long-term durability can be provided.
  • a resin film may be provided on the color filter.
  • the liquid crystal display device is composed of various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film in addition to the color filter in the present invention.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members.
  • these components for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
  • backlights SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), 25-30 pages (Takaaki Yagi), etc. It is described in.
  • Precursor compositions were prepared by mixing predetermined amounts of pigments, dispersants, and solvents described in Table 1 described below.
  • D / P represents the mass of the dispersant / the mass of the pigment.
  • viscosity (25 ° C.) (mPas)” in the “precursor composition” column intends the viscosity of the precursor composition at 25 ° C.
  • Step 1 solution temperature in the “Processing conditions” column intends the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in Step 1 (liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition).
  • Step 2 liquid temperature in the “Processing conditions” column intends the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in Step 2 (liquid temperature of the precursor composition to which the dispersion treatment is applied).
  • Pigment 1 120 g of titanium oxide TTO-51N (trade name: manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo) with a BET specific surface area of 110 m 2 / g, 25 g of silica particles AEROSIL 300 (registered trademark) 300/30 (manufactured by Evonik) with a BET surface area of 300 m 2 / g, and Dispersant Disperbyk190 (trade name: manufactured by Big Chemie) was weighed in an amount of 100 g. 71 g of ion exchange water was added to the mixture of these.
  • the mixture was processed at a revolution speed of 1360 rpm and a rotation speed of 1047 rpm for 30 minutes to obtain a uniform mixture aqueous solution.
  • This aqueous solution is filled in a quartz container, heated to 920 ° C. in an oxygen atmosphere using a small rotary kiln (manufactured by Motoyama Co., Ltd.), then the atmosphere is replaced with nitrogen, and ammonia gas is kept at 100 mL / min for 5 hours at the same temperature.
  • the nitriding reduction treatment was carried out by flowing.
  • the recovered powder was pulverized in a mortar to obtain a powdery titanium black (pigment 1) [pigment 1] containing titanium atoms and Si atoms, and containing Si atoms and a specific surface area of 85 m 2 / g.
  • Pigment 2 TTO-51 (C) (titanium oxide) manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Pigment 3: Mitsubishi Materials 13M-T (Titanium Black) Pigment 4: Mitsubishi Materials 12S (Titanium Black)
  • Dispersant 1 is a compound (acid value: 75 mgKOH / g) in which x / y / z (mol%) in formula (D1) is 43/8/49, and dispersant 4 is in formula (D1).
  • X / y / z (mol%) of the compound is 63/8/29 (acid value: 110 mg KOH / g), and dispersant 5 has x / y / z (mol%) in formula (D1) 69/8/23 (acid value: 120 mgKOH / g), and dispersant 6 is a compound (acid value) in which x / y / z (mol%) in formula (D1) is 14/8/78
  • the dispersant 7 is a compound (acid value: 20 mgKOH / g) in which x / y / z (mol%) in the formula (D1) is 11/8/81.
  • PGMEA Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • PGME Propylene glycol monomethyl ether
  • Step 1 liquid temperature the precursor composition preheated to a predetermined temperature was subjected to a bead mill disperser (NPM).
  • NPM bead mill disperser
  • -Pilot manufactured by Shinmaru Enterprises Co., Ltd. was subjected to dispersion treatment with a bead mill to produce a pigment dispersion.
  • the conditions of the bead mill are as follows.
  • the dispersion treatment was carried out while adjusting the liquid temperature of the precursor composition to the temperature shown in (Step 2 liquid temperature) shown in Table 1.
  • the end of the dispersion process was performed according to the following criteria.
  • the processing time in each example and comparative example is summarized in Table 1.
  • distribution process of each Example and a comparative example was determined as follows. During the dispersion treatment, 0.063 mL of the processing solution was sampled every 10 minutes, and the sampled sample was mixed with 10 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate to prepare a measurement sample.
  • the average particle diameter (D90) of the pigment is measured by (Nikkiso Co., Ltd.). The end point of the dispersion treatment was determined when the state in which the change in the average particle diameter (D90) of the sample sampled every 10 minutes was 10 nm or less continued four times continuously.
  • Example 16 A pigment dispersion was obtained in the same manner as in Example 5, except that the pigment was changed to carbon black (trade name: Color Black S170, average primary particle diameter: 17 nm, manufactured by Degussa). When the same evaluation as in Example 5 was performed, the same result as in Example 5 was obtained. From this result, it was confirmed that the effects of the present application can be obtained with respect to the other pigments described above.
  • Example 17 A pigment dispersion was obtained in the same manner as in Example 5, except that the pigment was changed to Pigment Red 254 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals, trade name BK-CF average primary particle size 30 nm). When the same evaluation as in Example 5 was performed, the same result as in Example 5 was obtained. From this result, it was confirmed that the effects of the present application can be obtained with respect to the other pigments described above.
  • Example 18 A pigment dispersion was obtained in the same manner as in Example 5 except that the dispersant was changed to Disperbyk110 (trade name, manufactured by Big Chemie Japan, acid value 53 mgKOH / g). When the same evaluation as in Example 5 was performed, the same result as in Example 5 was obtained. From this result, it was confirmed that the effects of the present application can be obtained with respect to other dispersants.
  • Example 19 In Example 1, the solid content concentration was increased to adjust the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor composition to 17 mPa ⁇ s, and the dispersion treatment was performed. Although the dispersion processing time was longer than that in Example 1, substantially the same evaluation results were obtained.
  • Example 20 The dispersion treatment was performed in the same manner as in Example 1 except that zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.1 mm were used in the dispersion treatment. In addition to the time required for dispersion in Example 1, the yield of the pigment dispersion decreased. As a result of various evaluations, the same evaluation results as in Example 1 were obtained except that the amount of solid content sedimentation after 9 months was 3.0% as compared with Example 1.
  • Example 8 In Example 1, the solid content concentration was increased to adjust the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor composition to 23 mPa ⁇ s, and the dispersion treatment was performed. The solid content sedimentation amount after 9 months was 11.2%, and it was found that the storage stability was inferior.
  • Example 9 (Comparative Example 9)
  • the solid content concentration was reduced, the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor composition was adjusted to 2 mPas, and the dispersion treatment was performed. Processing time exceeded 20 hours, and dispersion took time.
  • a binder solution 1 having a weight average molecular weight of 12,000 (polystyrene conversion value determined by GPC method), an acid value of 35 mgKOH / g, and a solid content of 30% by mass.
  • composition Components of the following composition were mixed with a stirrer and filtered through a filter to prepare curable composition A.
  • the following "part” intends a mass part.
  • composition (A) 50 parts of the pigment dispersion of Example 1 (F-1) Alkali-soluble resin: 17.0 parts of binder solution 1 (B) Polymerizable compound: KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) 5.0 parts
  • C Polymerization initiator: IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) 2.5 parts ⁇ (F-4) polymerization inhibitor: p-methoxyphenol 0.003 parts ⁇ (F-6) surfactant: MegaFac F781 (fluorine type surfactant, Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.01 parts
  • Organic solvent 10 parts propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • Organic solvent 10 parts cyclohexanone
  • the curable composition A immediately after preparation was put in a solution cup of a spray coating apparatus, applied to a glass substrate under the following application and heating conditions, and further subjected to a curing treatment to form a cured film 1.
  • Spray coating device PS-268 made by GSI Creos Spray application air pressure condition: 3000 cc / min Application amount: 0.2 cc / min Nozzle diameter: 0.4 mm
  • the spray outlet and the glass substrate coating surface are installed vertically.
  • Distance between spray outlet and glass substrate 3cm
  • Spray coating device PS-268 made by GSI Creos
  • the curable composition A to be evaluated is put in a solution cup of a spray coating apparatus, and after being allowed to stand at 25 ° C. for 96 hours, coating is performed under the following conditions with the spray coating apparatus, and evaluation is made on whether clogging occurs. It was possible to apply without clogging.
  • Spray application air pressure condition 3000 cc / min
  • Application amount 0.2 cc / min
  • Nozzle diameter 0.4 mm
  • the cured film 1 obtained above was measured for surface reflectance at a wavelength of 450 nm (incident angle of 5 degrees) with a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi High Technology, U-4100, and the reflectance was measured in%. In particular, in the case of a solid-state imaging device application, it is judged that there is practicality if the surface reflectance is 4% or less. The results obtained are as follows. Surface reflectance: 0.38%
  • the cured film 1 obtained above was measured for transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm with a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi High-Technology Co., Ltd. U-4100, and used as an indicator of light shielding rate.
  • a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi High-Technology Co., Ltd. U-4100
  • the transmittance is 1% or less.
  • the results obtained are as follows. Transmittance: 0.004%
  • the cured film of the present invention has good spray application suitability, and excellent light shielding properties and antireflection performance. Further, from this result, the cured film produced using the pigment dispersion of the present application is excellent in light shielding properties and antireflection performance, so that a solid-state imaging device having a light shielding layer, a color filter, a black matrix, and further It can be used suitably for manufacture of the image display apparatus which comprised.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Pigments, Carbon Blacks, Or Wood Stains (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Paints Or Removers (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides: a method for producing a pigment dispersion, which method achieves a quick treatment time and is capable of producing a pigment dispersion having excellent storage stability; a method for producing a curable composition; a method for producing a cured film; a method for producing a solid-state imaging element equipped with a cured film; a method for producing a color filter equipped with a cured film; and a method for producing an image display device equipped with a cured film. The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to the present invention has a step 1 for preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersing agent, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity of 3-20 mPa·s at 25°C, and a step 2 for subjecting the preheated precursor composition to a dispersion treatment using a bead mill while keeping the liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition at 40°C or higher but lower less than 60°C.

Description

顔料分散物の製造方法、硬化性組成物の製造方法、硬化膜の製造方法、硬化膜を具備する固体撮像素子の製造方法、硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタの製造方法、及び、硬化膜を具備する画像表示装置の製造方法Manufacturing method of pigment dispersion, manufacturing method of curable composition, manufacturing method of cured film, manufacturing method of solid-state imaging device including cured film, manufacturing method of color filter including cured film, and cured film Of manufacturing image display device
 本発明は、顔料分散物の製造方法、硬化性組成物の製造方法、硬化膜の製造方法、硬化膜を具備する固体撮像素子の製造方法、硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタの製造方法、及び、硬化膜を具備する画像表示装置の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a method for producing a pigment dispersion, a method for producing a curable composition, a method for producing a cured film, a method for producing a solid-state imaging device comprising a cured film, a method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film, and The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing an image display device having a cured film.
 顔料は耐光性などの堅牢性が優れるという点から、着色剤として好適に用いられている。顔料を用いる場合、通常、顔料は凝集物として存在しているため、その凝集物を解すために所定の分散処理を行い、顔料が微細に分散した顔料分散物を調製して、使用する。
 例えば、特許文献1においては、顔料とポリマー(分散剤)とを含む組成物に対してビーズを用いた分散処理に施し、顔料分散物を得る方法が開示されている。
The pigment is preferably used as a colorant from the viewpoint of excellent fastness such as light resistance. In the case of using a pigment, since the pigment is usually present as an aggregate, a predetermined dispersion treatment is performed to dissolve the aggregate, and a pigment dispersion in which the pigment is finely dispersed is prepared and used.
For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a method of obtaining a pigment dispersion by subjecting a composition containing a pigment and a polymer (dispersant) to a dispersion treatment using beads.
特開2006-182885号公報JP 2006-182885 A
 近年、顔料濃度がより高い顔料分散物が求められているが、このような顔料分散物を得るためには、分散処理を施す前駆体組成物中に含まれる仕込みの顔料濃度を高くする必要がある。一方で、前駆体組成物中での顔料濃度を高めようとすると、前駆体組成物の粘度が増加してしまう。
 本発明者らは、粘度が高い前駆体組成物を調製し、特許文献1に記載されるようなビーズを用いた分散処理(いわゆる、ビーズミル)を前駆体組成物に施した場合、顔料の十分な微分散が達成されない、又は、顔料の十分な分散を達成しようとすると、処理時間が長くなり生産性が劣ることを知見している。
 また、得られた顔料分散物を所定時間保管すると、顔料分散物の粘度の増加、及び/又は、顔料の沈降などが生じ、いわゆる保存安定性の点で更なる改良が必要であることも知見している。
In recent years, a pigment dispersion having a higher pigment concentration has been demanded. In order to obtain such a pigment dispersion, it is necessary to increase the concentration of the pigment contained in the precursor composition subjected to the dispersion treatment. is there. On the other hand, when trying to increase the pigment concentration in the precursor composition, the viscosity of the precursor composition increases.
When the present inventors prepared a precursor composition having a high viscosity and applied a dispersion treatment (so-called bead mill) using beads as described in Patent Document 1, the pigment composition is sufficient. It has been found that if fine dispersion is not achieved or if sufficient dispersion of the pigment is to be achieved, the processing time becomes long and the productivity is poor.
It is also found that when the obtained pigment dispersion is stored for a predetermined time, the viscosity of the pigment dispersion increases and / or the pigment settles, and further improvement is necessary in terms of so-called storage stability. is doing.
 本発明は、上記実情に鑑みて、処理時間が短く、かつ、保存安定性に優れる顔料分散物を製造できる、顔料分散物の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。
 また、本発明は、硬化性組成物の製造方法、硬化膜の製造方法、硬化膜を具備する固体撮像素子の製造方法、硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタの製造方法、及び、硬化膜を具備する画像表示装置の製造方法を提供することも目的とする。
An object of this invention is to provide the manufacturing method of a pigment dispersion which can manufacture the pigment dispersion which is short in processing time and excellent in storage stability in view of the said situation.
Moreover, this invention comprises the manufacturing method of a curable composition, the manufacturing method of a cured film, the manufacturing method of the solid-state image sensor which comprises a cured film, the manufacturing method of the color filter which comprises a cured film, and a cured film. It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for manufacturing an image display device.
 本発明者は、上記課題を達成すべく鋭意研究した結果、所定の成分を含む前駆体組成物を予熱する工程を設けることにより、上記課題を解決できることを見出し、本発明を完成させた。
 すなわち、本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記課題が解決できることを見出した。
As a result of intensive studies to achieve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventors have found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved by providing a step of preheating a precursor composition containing a predetermined component, and have completed the present invention.
That is, the present inventors have found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
(1) 顔料と、分散剤と、有機溶媒とを含み、25℃における粘度が3~20mPa・sである前駆体組成物を予熱する工程1と、
 予熱された前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上60℃未満に保ちつつ、前駆体組成物に対してビーズミルによる分散処理を施す工程2と、を有する顔料分散物の製造方法。
(2) 顔料の一次粒子径が55nm未満である、(1)に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。
(3) 分散剤の酸価が30~100mgKOH/gである、(1)又は(2)に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。
(4) ビーズミルにて、直径0.05mm以下のビーズを用いる、(1)~(3)のいずれかに記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。
(5) 工程1において、前駆体組成物の液温が40~60℃に予熱される、(1)~(4)のいずれかに記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。
(6) 工程2での前駆体組成物の液温が40℃超57℃未満に保たれる、(1)~(5)のいずれかに記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。
(7) (1)~(6)のいずれかに記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、を有する硬化性組成物の製造方法。
(8) (1)~(6)のいずれかに記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜の製造方法。
(9) (1)~(6)のいずれかに記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜を具備する固体撮像素子の製造方法。
(10) (1)~(6)のいずれかに記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(11) (1)~(6)のいずれかに記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
 工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜を具備する画像表示装置の製造方法。
(1) Step 1 of preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity of 3 to 20 mPa · s at 25 ° C .;
And a step 2 of subjecting the precursor composition to a dispersion treatment by a bead mill while keeping the liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition at 40 ° C. or more and less than 60 ° C.
(2) The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to (1), wherein the primary particle diameter of the pigment is less than 55 nm.
(3) The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to (1) or (2), wherein the acid value of the dispersant is from 30 to 100 mgKOH / g.
(4) The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein beads having a diameter of 0.05 mm or less are used in a bead mill.
(5) The process for producing a pigment dispersion according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein in step 1, the liquid temperature of the precursor composition is preheated to 40 to 60 ° C.
(6) The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to any one of (1) to (5), wherein the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in Step 2 is maintained at more than 40 ° C. and less than 57 ° C.
(7) A step of obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of (1) to (6);
A method for producing a curable composition, comprising: mixing a pigment dispersion obtained in the step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition.
(8) A step of obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of (1) to (6);
Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
Curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
(9) A step of obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of (1) to (6);
Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
A method for producing a solid-state imaging device, comprising: a step of curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
(10) A step of obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of (1) to (6);
Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
A method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film comprising: curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
(11) A step of obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of (1) to (6);
Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
And a step of curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
 本発明によれば、処理時間が短く、かつ、保存安定性に優れる顔料分散物を製造できる、顔料分散物の製造方法を提供できる。
 また、本発明によれば、硬化性組成物の製造方法、硬化膜の製造方法、硬化膜を具備する固体撮像素子の製造方法、硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタの製造方法、及び、硬化膜を具備する画像表示装置の製造方法を提供することもできる。
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the manufacturing method of a pigment dispersion which can manufacture the pigment dispersion which is short in processing time and excellent in storage stability can be provided.
Further, according to the present invention, there is provided a method for producing a curable composition, a method for producing a cured film, a method for producing a solid-state imaging device comprising a cured film, a method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film, and a cured film. It is also possible to provide a method for manufacturing the image display device provided.
本発明の製造方法を実施するための一実施態様を模式的に示す概略図であるIt is the schematic which shows one embodiment for enforcing the manufacturing method of this invention typically 第1実施形態の固体撮像装置を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the solid-state imaging device of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の固体撮像装置の分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of the solid-state imaging device of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の固体撮像装置を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the solid-state imaging device of 1st Embodiment. 第2実施形態の固体撮像装置を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the solid-state imaging device of 2nd Embodiment. 第3実施形態の固体撮像装置を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the solid-state imaging device of 3rd Embodiment. 第4実施形態の固体撮像装置を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the solid-state imaging device of 4th Embodiment.
 以下、本発明を実施するための形態について説明する。
 なお、本明細書に於ける基(原子団)の表記に於いて、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本明細書中において、“(メタ)アクリレート”はアクリレート及びメタクリレートを表し、“(メタ)アクリル”はアクリル及びメタクリルを表し、“(メタ)アクリロイル”はアクリロイル及びメタクリロイルを表す。
 本発明における顔料とは、例えば、溶剤に溶解しない不溶性の色素化合物を意味する。ここで、溶剤とは、後述する溶剤の欄で例示する溶剤が挙げられる。したがって、これらの溶剤に溶解しない色素化合物が本発明における顔料に該当する。
 本明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 なお、本明細書において、「構造単位」とは「繰り返し単位」と同義である。
Hereinafter, modes for carrying out the present invention will be described.
In addition, in the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent. . For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In the present specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl, and “(meth) acryloyl” represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
The pigment in the present invention means, for example, an insoluble coloring compound that does not dissolve in a solvent. Here, the solvent includes the solvent exemplified in the solvent column described later. Therefore, the coloring compound which does not melt | dissolve in these solvents corresponds to the pigment in this invention.
In the present specification, “to” is used in the sense of including the numerical values described before and after it as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the present specification, “structural unit” is synonymous with “repeating unit”.
 本発明の特徴点の一つとしては、まず、所定の成分を含む前駆体組成物にビーズミルによる分散処理を施す前に、前駆体組成物を予熱する処理を実施している点が挙げられる。そもそも、前駆体組成物の粘度が高い場合、ビーズミルによる分散処理を実施しても、前駆体組成物への分散力は伝わりにくく、顔料の微分散が困難であった。特許文献1では前駆体組成物を所定の温度に加熱しながら分散処理を実施しているが、本発明者が検討を行った結果、このような処理でも必ずしも十分な効果が得られなかった。そこで、前駆体組成物を予め加熱(予熱)してその粘度を十分に低下させた後に、所定の温度を保ちつつビーズミルによる分散処理を実施することにより、所望の効果が得られることを見出している。
 また、本発明の好適態様として、使用される成分に関して、所定の大きさ未満の顔料、及び、所定の酸価の分散剤を用いることが好ましい点も見出している。特に、このような成分を使用すると、所定の温度に前駆体組成物を調整する際に、分散剤の顔料への吸着性が向上し、結果として、保存安定性がより優れる顔料分散物が得られると推測される。
One of the features of the present invention is that, first, a precursor composition containing a predetermined component is subjected to a preheating treatment prior to a dispersion treatment using a bead mill. In the first place, when the viscosity of the precursor composition is high, even if the dispersion treatment by the bead mill is performed, the dispersion force to the precursor composition is hardly transmitted, and the fine dispersion of the pigment is difficult. In Patent Document 1, the dispersion treatment is carried out while heating the precursor composition to a predetermined temperature. However, as a result of investigation by the present inventor, such treatment has not always obtained a sufficient effect. Therefore, after preheating (preheating) the precursor composition to sufficiently reduce its viscosity, it is found that a desired effect can be obtained by carrying out a dispersion treatment with a bead mill while maintaining a predetermined temperature. Yes.
Further, as a preferred embodiment of the present invention, it has also been found that it is preferable to use a pigment having a size less than a predetermined size and a dispersant having a predetermined acid value for the components used. In particular, when such a component is used, when the precursor composition is adjusted to a predetermined temperature, the adsorptivity of the dispersant to the pigment is improved, and as a result, a pigment dispersion having better storage stability is obtained. It is estimated that.
 本発明の顔料分散物の製造方法は、少なくとも以下の2つの工程を有する。
工程1:顔料と、分散剤と、有機溶媒とを含み、25℃における粘度が3~20mPa・sである前駆体組成物を予熱する工程
工程2:予熱された前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上60℃未満に保ちつつ、前駆体組成物に対してビーズミルによる分散処理を施す工程
 以下、各工程について詳述する。なお、本製造方法で使用される材料の詳細については、後段でまとめて詳述する。
The method for producing a pigment dispersion of the present invention has at least the following two steps.
Step 1: Preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity of 3 to 20 mPa · s at 25 ° C. Step 2: Liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition The process which performs the dispersion process by a bead mill with respect to a precursor composition, keeping 40 degreeC or more and less than 60 degreeC Hereinafter, each process is explained in full detail. The details of the materials used in this production method will be described in detail later.
<工程1(予熱工程)>
 工程1は、顔料と、分散剤と、有機溶媒とを含み、25℃における粘度が3~20mPa・sである前駆体組成物を予熱する工程である。後述する分散処理を施す前に、前駆体組成物を十分に予熱することにより、分散処理での分散力が十分に伝達され、処理時間の短縮と共に、得られる顔料分散物の保存安定性も向上する。
<Process 1 (preheating process)>
Step 1 is a step of preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of 3 to 20 mPa · s. By sufficiently preheating the precursor composition before the dispersion treatment described below, the dispersion force in the dispersion treatment is sufficiently transmitted, shortening the treatment time and improving the storage stability of the resulting pigment dispersion. To do.
 本工程で使用される前駆体組成物には、顔料と、分散剤と、有機溶媒とが少なくとも含まれる。前駆体組成物に含まれる各成分に関しては、後段で詳述する。
 本工程で使用される前駆体組成物の25℃における粘度は、3~20mPa・sであり、分散処理の処理時間がより短縮される点、及び、顔料分散物の保存安定性がより優れる点の少なくとも一方が満たされる点(以後、単に「本発明の効果がより優れる点」とも称する)で、3~17mPa・sが好ましく、3~15mPa・sがより好ましい。
 上記粘度は、前駆体組成物を25℃に調整して、粘度計RE-85L(東機産業(株)製)を用いて測定する。
The precursor composition used in this step includes at least a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent. Each component contained in the precursor composition will be described in detail later.
The viscosity at 25 ° C. of the precursor composition used in this step is 3 to 20 mPa · s, the processing time of the dispersion treatment is further shortened, and the storage stability of the pigment dispersion is more excellent 3 to 17 mPa · s is preferable, and 3 to 15 mPa · s is more preferable in that at least one of the above is satisfied (hereinafter also referred to simply as “the point where the effect of the present invention is more excellent”).
The viscosity is measured using a viscometer RE-85L (manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.) after adjusting the precursor composition to 25 ° C.
 本工程では前駆体組成物を予熱(加熱)する。前駆体組成物を予熱することで、顔料表面に対する有機溶媒の濡れが向上するほか、分散剤の溶解と分散媒の均一化が進む。また、顔料への分散剤の吸着が効率的に起こるため、処理時間が短くなり、顔料分散物の保存安定性に優れる。
 更には、顔料への分散剤の吸着が分散処理の初期から効率的に進むため、未吸着の分散剤の量が低減することにより、経時での異物(顔料粒子、未吸着の分散剤などの凝集物)の発生が抑制されることが分かった。特に、黒色顔料を使用した際に、その効果は顕著である。
 また、予熱することにより前駆体組成物の粘度が低下することが予想され、後段で詳述するビーズによるせん断力が伝わりやすくなり、分散進行が速まると考えられる。
 上記の効果が顕著に得られる観点から、前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上に予熱することが好ましい。なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、上記液温を40~60℃に予熱することが好ましく、40℃超57℃未満に予熱することがより好ましく、42~50℃に予熱することが更に好ましい。
 上記の効果が顕著に得られる観点から、前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上に予熱することが好ましい。なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、上記液温を40~60℃に予熱することが好ましく、40℃超57℃未満に予熱することがより好ましく、42~50℃に予熱することが更に好ましい。
 また、予熱時間は5分~3時間であることが好ましく、10分~2時間であることがより好ましく、15分~1.5時間であることが更に好ましい。上記の範囲であると、顔料への分散剤の吸着が分散処理の初期から効率的に進み、上記の効果が顕著に得られ、また、オーバーヒートが防げる他、作業時間としても問題がない。
 前駆体組成物を予熱する方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用できる。
 なお、前駆体組成物を予熱する本工程は、後述する工程2(分散処理工程)とは別の工程である。後段で詳述するように工程2ではビーズミルを実施するためのビーズミル分散機が使用されるが、工程1は前駆体組成物がビーズミル分散機の粉砕室内に供給される前に実施される処理である。つまり、ビーズミル分散機の粉砕室内に供給される前に、前駆体組成物を予熱する処理である。
 なお、粉砕室とは、ローター(回転ローター)が配置されると共にビーズが充填され、ローターの回転によって、ビーズが撹拌され、撹拌されたビーズにより前駆体組成物中の顔料にせん断力が与えられる部屋である。
In this step, the precursor composition is preheated (heated). By preheating the precursor composition, wetting of the organic solvent to the pigment surface is improved, and the dissolution of the dispersant and the homogenization of the dispersion medium proceed. In addition, since the adsorption of the dispersant to the pigment occurs efficiently, the treatment time is shortened and the storage stability of the pigment dispersion is excellent.
Furthermore, since the adsorption of the dispersant to the pigment proceeds efficiently from the initial stage of the dispersion treatment, the amount of the unadsorbed dispersant is reduced, so that foreign matter (pigment particles, unadsorbed dispersant, etc.) It was found that the generation of aggregates was suppressed. In particular, when a black pigment is used, the effect is remarkable.
In addition, it is expected that the viscosity of the precursor composition is lowered by preheating, the shearing force due to the beads described later in detail is easily transmitted, and the progress of dispersion is thought to be accelerated.
From the viewpoint of remarkably obtaining the above effect, it is preferable to preheat the liquid temperature of the precursor composition to 40 ° C. or higher. Among these, the temperature of the liquid is preferably preheated to 40 to 60 ° C, more preferably preheated to more than 40 ° C and less than 57 ° C, and preheated to 42 to 50 ° C in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Is more preferable.
From the viewpoint of remarkably obtaining the above effect, it is preferable to preheat the liquid temperature of the precursor composition to 40 ° C. or higher. Among these, the temperature of the liquid is preferably preheated to 40 to 60 ° C, more preferably preheated to more than 40 ° C and less than 57 ° C, and preheated to 42 to 50 ° C in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Is more preferable.
The preheating time is preferably 5 minutes to 3 hours, more preferably 10 minutes to 2 hours, and further preferably 15 minutes to 1.5 hours. Within the above range, the adsorption of the dispersing agent to the pigment proceeds efficiently from the initial stage of the dispersion treatment, the above effects can be obtained remarkably, overheating can be prevented, and there is no problem in the working time.
The method for preheating the precursor composition is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted.
In addition, this process of preheating a precursor composition is a process different from the process 2 (dispersion process process) mentioned later. As will be described in detail later, in step 2, a bead mill disperser for performing bead milling is used, but step 1 is a process performed before the precursor composition is supplied into the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser. is there. That is, it is a process of preheating the precursor composition before being supplied into the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser.
The crushing chamber is a rotor (rotary rotor) arranged and filled with beads. The beads are agitated by the rotation of the rotor, and shearing force is applied to the pigment in the precursor composition by the agitated beads. It is a room.
<工程2(分散処理工程)>
 工程2は、予熱された前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上60℃未満に保ちつつ、前駆体組成物に対してビーズミルによる分散処理を施す工程である。本工程を実施することにより、顔料が解されて、顔料の分散安定性が高い顔料分散物を得ることができる。
<Process 2 (dispersion process)>
Step 2 is a step of subjecting the precursor composition to a dispersion treatment by a bead mill while keeping the liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition at 40 ° C. or more and less than 60 ° C. By carrying out this step, the pigment is dissolved and a pigment dispersion having high pigment dispersion stability can be obtained.
 工程2では、工程1で予熱された前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上60℃未満に保ちつつ、後述する分散処理を実施する。つまり、液温が40℃以上60℃未満に調整された前駆体組成物に対して分散処理を施す。なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点、前駆体組成物の液温は、40℃超57℃未満に保たれることが好ましく、42~50℃に保たれることがより好ましい。
 上記温度条件で処理することにより、顔料への分散剤の吸着が効率的に起こるため、処理時間が短くなり、顔料分散物の保存安定性に優れる。
 また、予熱処理(工程1)からの温度を維持又はそれより高い温度にすることにより、顔料への分散剤の吸着が分散処理の初期から効率的に進むため、未吸着の分散剤の量が低減することにより、経時での異物(顔料粒子、未吸着の分散剤などの凝集物)の発生が抑制されることが分かった。特に、黒色顔料及び白色顔料を使用した際には、有彩色顔料に比べ、顔料表面の活性が高いため、顔料同士が凝集しやすく、その効果は顕著である。
In step 2, a dispersion treatment described later is performed while keeping the liquid temperature of the precursor composition preheated in step 1 at 40 ° C. or higher and lower than 60 ° C. That is, the dispersion treatment is performed on the precursor composition whose liquid temperature is adjusted to 40 ° C. or more and less than 60 ° C. Among these, the temperature of the precursor composition is preferably maintained at more than 40 ° C. and less than 57 ° C., more preferably from 42 to 50 ° C., in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
By treating under the above temperature conditions, the adsorption of the dispersant to the pigment occurs efficiently, so the treatment time is shortened and the storage stability of the pigment dispersion is excellent.
Also, by maintaining or raising the temperature from the pre-heat treatment (step 1), the adsorption of the dispersant to the pigment proceeds efficiently from the beginning of the dispersion treatment, so the amount of the unadsorbed dispersant can be reduced. It has been found that the reduction reduces the generation of foreign matter (aggregates such as pigment particles and unadsorbed dispersant) over time. In particular, when black pigments and white pigments are used, the pigment surface tends to agglomerate because the activity of the pigment surface is higher than that of chromatic pigments, and the effect is remarkable.
 後段で詳述するが、工程2の分散処理は、公知のビーズミル分散機を用いて実施される。工程1で予熱された前駆体組成物をビーズミル分散機の粉砕室内に供給する方法は特に制限されず、例えば、図1に示すように、所定の温度に予熱された前駆体組成物Wをタンク200に入れて、図示しないポンプを用いて、タンク200から配管300を介してビーズミル分散機500の粉砕室に連続的に供給できる。なお、前駆体組成物Wの温度が変化しないように、配管300自体も所定の温度に加熱してもよい。
 なお、図1では、所定の温度に予熱された前駆体組成物Wがビーズミル粉砕機の粉砕室に連続的に供給する態様を示したが、この態様に制限されず、例えば、所定の温度に予熱された前駆体組成物がビーズミル粉砕機に供給されて処理が施された後、更に処理が施された前駆体組成物が再度ビーズミル粉砕機に供給されるように、前駆体組成物を循環させながら分散処理を施してもよい。
As will be described in detail later, the dispersion treatment in step 2 is performed using a known bead mill disperser. The method for supplying the precursor composition preheated in step 1 into the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 200, and can be continuously supplied from the tank 200 to the grinding chamber of the bead mill disperser 500 through the pipe 300 using a pump (not shown). The pipe 300 itself may be heated to a predetermined temperature so that the temperature of the precursor composition W does not change.
FIG. 1 shows an embodiment in which the precursor composition W preheated to a predetermined temperature is continuously supplied to the pulverization chamber of the bead mill pulverizer. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. After the preheated precursor composition is supplied to the bead mill and processed, the precursor composition is circulated so that the further processed precursor composition is supplied to the bead mill again. You may perform a dispersion process, making it.
 なお、予熱された前駆体組成物をビーズミル分散機(ビーズミル分散機中の粉砕室)に供給する際の供給量(処理液量)は特に制限されないが、生産性の点から、3~500kg/分が好ましく、10~100kg/分がより好ましい。 The supply amount (treatment liquid amount) when the preheated precursor composition is supplied to the bead mill disperser (grinding chamber in the bead mill disperser) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of productivity, 3 to 500 kg / Min is preferred, and 10 to 100 kg / min is more preferred.
 工程2では、公知のビーズミル分散機を用いることにより、ビーズミルによる分散処理が実施される。
 ビーズミル分散機としては、ウルトラビスコミル、アジテータミル、スーパーアペックスミル、ウルトラアペックスミル、ダイノーミル、ファインミル、アニュラーギャップ型ミル、及び、MSCミル等が挙げられ、好適に用いることができる。
 また、ビーズ分離方式には遠心分離方式、スクリーン方式、及び、スリット方式があるが、0.1mm以下のビーズを使用する際は、遠心分離方式が好ましい。
 また、後段で詳述するように、より微小なビーズを使用する場合には、ビーズを動かすためのローターと、セパレーター(遠心分離機構)とが別駆動であることが、ビーズ分離の観点でより好ましい。このような装置としては、シンマルエンタープライゼス製NPM‐Pilot、浅田鉄工製エコミル、及び、寿工業製デュアルアペックスミルなどスクリーンレスの装置が、液詰まりをより回避できるため好適である。
In step 2, a dispersion process using a bead mill is performed by using a known bead mill disperser.
Examples of the bead mill disperser include an ultra visco mill, an agitator mill, a super apex mill, an ultra apex mill, a dyno mill, a fine mill, an annular gap type mill, an MSC mill, and the like, and can be preferably used.
In addition, the bead separation method includes a centrifugal separation method, a screen method, and a slit method. When using beads of 0.1 mm or less, the centrifugal separation method is preferable.
In addition, as will be described in detail later, when using finer beads, the rotor for moving the beads and the separator (centrifugation mechanism) must be driven separately from the viewpoint of bead separation. preferable. As such a device, screenless devices such as NPM-Pilot manufactured by Shinmaru Enterprises, Eco-Mill manufactured by Asada Tekko, and dual apex mill manufactured by Kotobuki Kogyo are preferred because they can avoid clogging.
 ビーズミル分散機内には、粉砕室が設けられている。上述したように、粉砕室内には、通常、ローターが設けられている。このローターは、例えば、円盤状、棒状、又は、羽根状などになっていて、駆動装置によって回転駆動される回転軸に接続されている。このため、ローターは、回転軸の回転に伴って周方向に回転可能に設けられている。更に、ローターの端部近傍には、ローターの回転によってビーズを効率よく攪拌できるようにするために、突起が形成されていてもよい。 In the bead mill disperser, a crushing chamber is provided. As described above, a rotor is usually provided in the grinding chamber. The rotor has, for example, a disk shape, a rod shape, or a blade shape, and is connected to a rotation shaft that is rotationally driven by a driving device. For this reason, the rotor is provided so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotation shaft. Furthermore, a protrusion may be formed near the end of the rotor so that the beads can be efficiently stirred by the rotation of the rotor.
 粉砕室内には、ビーズが充填されている。
 ビーズの種類は特に制限されず、ガラスビーズ、アルミナビーズ、ジルコニアシリケートビーズ、及び、ジルコニアビーズなどが挙げられる。
 ビーズの直径は特に制限されないが、通常、3mm以下の場合多く、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、1mm以下が好ましく、0.3mm以下がより好ましく、0.05mm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、通常、0.01mm以上の場合が多い。
 上記ビーズの直径は平均値であり、具体的には、任意の100個のビーズの直径を測定し、それらを算術平均した値である。なお、ビーズが真円状でない場合は、長径を直径として測定を行う。
The grinding chamber is filled with beads.
The kind of bead is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include glass beads, alumina beads, zirconia silicate beads, and zirconia beads.
The diameter of the bead is not particularly limited, but is usually 3 mm or less, and is preferably 1 mm or less, more preferably 0.3 mm or less, and even more preferably 0.05 mm or less from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 0.01 mm or more in many cases.
The diameter of the beads is an average value. Specifically, it is a value obtained by measuring the diameters of arbitrary 100 beads and arithmetically averaging them. In addition, when a bead is not perfect circle shape, it measures by making a major axis into a diameter.
 粉砕室におけるビーズの充填率は特に制限されないが、40体積%以上が好ましく、50体積%以上がより好ましく、60体積%以上が更に好ましい。上限としては、98体積%以下が好ましく、95体積%以下がより好ましく、90体積%以下が更に好ましい。充填率を上記下限値以上にすることにより、効率的に顔料を分散させることができる。また、上限値以下にすることにより、粉砕室内でビーズが動き回る十分な空間を確保できる。ここで、ビーズの充填率は、ビーズの重量をビーズのかさ密度で割ることによりビーズの充填体積を計算し、その充填体積を粉砕室の容積で割ることにより求める。 The filling rate of beads in the grinding chamber is not particularly limited, but is preferably 40% by volume or more, more preferably 50% by volume or more, and still more preferably 60% by volume or more. As an upper limit, 98 volume% or less is preferable, 95 volume% or less is more preferable, and 90 volume% or less is still more preferable. By making the filling rate equal to or more than the above lower limit value, the pigment can be efficiently dispersed. In addition, by setting it to the upper limit value or less, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for the beads to move around in the grinding chamber. Here, the filling rate of the beads is obtained by calculating the filling volume of the beads by dividing the weight of the beads by the bulk density of the beads and dividing the filling volume by the volume of the grinding chamber.
 粉砕室内では、ローター及びビーズにより、顔料の分散処理が行われる。すなわち、ローターの回転によってビーズが攪拌される。攪拌されたビーズにより、顔料にせん断力が与えられる。このせん断力によって顔料の二次粒子は解されて、一次粒子となる。また、これらの顔料はビーズにより攪拌されるので、有機溶媒などの溶媒に均一に分散する。 In the grinding chamber, the pigment is dispersed by the rotor and beads. That is, the beads are agitated by the rotation of the rotor. The stirred beads give a shearing force to the pigment. By this shearing force, the secondary particles of the pigment are solved and become primary particles. Further, since these pigments are stirred by beads, they are uniformly dispersed in a solvent such as an organic solvent.
 ローターの回転時におけるローターの周速は特に制限されず、通常、0.1m/秒以上が好ましく、1m/秒以上がより好ましく、5m/秒以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、15m/秒以下の場合が多い。ここでローターの周速とは、ローターの外縁部の速度のことをいう。
 なお、上述したように、ビーズミル分散機の種類によっては、上記ローターと、解された顔料及びビーズを分離するセパレーター(分離部。特に、遠心分離部)と、が別々の駆動系によって動かされる装置がある。そのような装置の場合、セパレーターも上記ローターと同様に回転することにより顔料とビーズとの分離を行っている。この場合、セパレーターの周速は特に制限されず、通常、0.1m/秒以上が好ましく、1m/秒以上がより好ましく、5m/秒以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、15m/秒以下の場合が多い。ここでセパレーターの周速とは、セパレーターの外縁部の速度のことをいう。
The peripheral speed of the rotor during rotation of the rotor is not particularly limited, and is usually preferably 0.1 m / second or more, more preferably 1 m / second or more, and further preferably 5 m / second or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is often 15 m / second or less. Here, the circumferential speed of the rotor refers to the speed of the outer edge of the rotor.
In addition, as described above, depending on the type of the bead mill disperser, the rotor and the separator (separation unit, in particular, the centrifuge unit) that separates the dissolved pigment and beads are driven by separate drive systems. There is. In such an apparatus, the separator is also rotated in the same manner as the rotor to separate the pigment and the beads. In this case, the peripheral speed of the separator is not particularly limited, and is usually preferably 0.1 m / second or more, more preferably 1 m / second or more, and further preferably 5 m / second or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is often 15 m / second or less. Here, the peripheral speed of the separator refers to the speed of the outer edge portion of the separator.
 分散処理の処理時間は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、処理液の仕込み量を15kgとした際に1~10時間が好ましく、5~9.0時間がより好ましい。処理時間の長さは、厳密ではないが、液量にほぼ比例して長くすることが好ましい。 The treatment time of the dispersion treatment is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, 1 to 10 hours are preferable and 5 to 9.0 hours are more preferable when the amount of the treatment liquid charged is 15 kg. Although the length of the treatment time is not strict, it is preferable to increase the treatment time in proportion to the liquid amount.
 更に、ローターの回転を行うと、ビーズの摩擦により、熱が生じることがある。そのため、粉砕室の周りに配管を配置して、配管内に冷媒を流すことにより、粉砕室内の前駆体組成物の液温を調整できる。 Furthermore, when the rotor is rotated, heat may be generated due to the friction of the beads. Therefore, the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in the grinding chamber can be adjusted by arranging piping around the grinding chamber and flowing the refrigerant in the piping.
 粉砕室内で解された顔料は、フィルタなどによりビーズと分離され、回収される。なお、上述したように、セパレーターが回転する場合は、遠心分離により顔料とビーズとが分離される。 The pigment dissolved in the grinding chamber is separated from the beads by a filter and collected. In addition, as above-mentioned, when a separator rotates, a pigment and a bead are isolate | separated by centrifugation.
 上記分散処理が施された顔料(微粉末状顔料)の平均粒子径(つまり、顔料分散物中での顔料の平均粒子径)は特に制限されず、使用される顔料の一次粒子径によって異なるが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、(顔料の一次粒子径)以上(顔料の一次粒子径×10倍)以下の範囲であることが好ましく、(顔料の一次粒子径)以上(顔料の一次粒子径×6倍)以下の範囲であることがより好ましい。
 顔料分散物中の顔料の平均粒子径の測定方法としては、動的光散乱法(FFT(Fast Fourier Transform)パワースペクトル法)が知られている。より具体的には、マイクロトラックEX-150(日機装製)により求められるD90を、上記顔料の平均粒子径とする。
The average particle size (that is, the average particle size of the pigment in the pigment dispersion) of the pigment (fine powder pigment) that has been subjected to the above-described dispersion treatment is not particularly limited, and varies depending on the primary particle size of the pigment used. From the viewpoint of more excellent effects of the present invention, it is preferably in the range of (primary particle diameter of pigment) or more (primary particle diameter of pigment × 10 times) or less, (primary particle diameter of pigment) or more (primary particle diameter of pigment). (Particle diameter × 6 times) or less is more preferable.
As a method for measuring the average particle diameter of the pigment in the pigment dispersion, a dynamic light scattering method (FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) power spectrum method) is known. More specifically, D90 calculated by Microtrac EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso) is defined as the average particle diameter of the pigment.
 以下、本製造方法で使用される各種材料について詳述する。 Hereinafter, various materials used in this production method will be described in detail.
<顔料>
 顔料は、従来公知の種々の無機顔料又は有機顔料を用いることができる。
 また、本発明で用いられる顔料の一次粒子径は、55nm未満であることが好ましい。分散処理の初期に、分散剤の吸脱着に関与する顔料粒子の表面積が大きくなり、本発明の効果がより優れる。更に、50nm以下がより好ましく、40nm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、5nm以上の場合が多い。
 顔料の一次粒子径は平均値であり、電子顕微鏡にて任意の400個の顔料の一次粒子径を測定して、それらを算術平均したものである。なお、顔料が真円状でない場合は、円相当径を用いる。なお、円相当径とは、観察される顔料の2次元画像の面積(投影面積)と同じ面積に相当する円の直径を意味する。
<Pigment>
Various conventionally known inorganic pigments or organic pigments can be used as the pigment.
The primary particle diameter of the pigment used in the present invention is preferably less than 55 nm. In the initial stage of the dispersion treatment, the surface area of the pigment particles involved in the adsorption / desorption of the dispersant is increased, and the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Furthermore, 50 nm or less is more preferable, and 40 nm or less is still more preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is often 5 nm or more.
The primary particle diameter of the pigment is an average value, and the primary particle diameters of arbitrary 400 pigments are measured with an electron microscope, and they are arithmetically averaged. In addition, when a pigment is not a perfect circle shape, a circle equivalent diameter is used. The equivalent circle diameter means the diameter of a circle corresponding to the same area as the area (projected area) of the observed two-dimensional image of the pigment.
 無機顔料としては、金属酸化物及び金属錯塩などの金属化合物が挙げられる。具体的には、鉄、コバルト、アルミニウム、カドミウム、鉛、銅、チタン、マグネシウム、クロム、亜鉛、及び、アンチモン等の金属酸化物、並びに、上記金属の複合酸化物が挙げられる。 Examples of inorganic pigments include metal compounds such as metal oxides and metal complex salts. Specific examples include metal oxides such as iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper, titanium, magnesium, chromium, zinc, and antimony, and composite oxides of the above metals.
 有機顔料としては、例えば、以下が挙げられる。
 C.I.Pigment YELLOW 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214等、
 C.I.Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等、
 C.I.Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279
 C.I. Pigment Green 7,10,36,37,58,59
 C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42
 C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,60,64,66,79,80
 C.I.Pigment Black 1
 これら有機顔料は、単独又は色純度を上げるため種々組合せて用いることができる。
Examples of the organic pigment include the following.
C. I. Pigment YELLOW 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 17 , Etc. 175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. ,
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279
C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59
C. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80
C. I. Pigment Black 1
These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase the color purity.
 なかでも、顔料としては黒色顔料が好適に挙げられる。
 黒色顔料は、各種公知の黒色顔料を用いることができる。特に、少量で高い光学濃度を実現できる観点から、カーボンブラック、チタンブラック、酸化チタン、酸化タングステン、及び、セシウム酸化タングステンなどの酸化タングステン化合物、金属ホウ化物、酸化鉄、酸化マンガン、グラファイト、炭化チタン、炭化ジルコニウム、ホウ化ジルコニウム、炭化ホウ素、並びに、ホウ化ケイ素が好ましく、カーボンブラック又はチタンブラックがより好ましく、チタンブラックが更に好ましい。
Of these, a black pigment is preferably used as the pigment.
Various known black pigments can be used as the black pigment. In particular, from the viewpoint of realizing high optical density in a small amount, tungsten oxide compounds such as carbon black, titanium black, titanium oxide, tungsten oxide, and cesium tungsten oxide, metal borides, iron oxide, manganese oxide, graphite, titanium carbide Zirconium carbide, zirconium boride, boron carbide, and silicon boride are preferable, carbon black or titanium black is more preferable, and titanium black is still more preferable.
 チタンブラックとは、チタン原子を含有する黒色粒子である。好ましくは低次酸化チタン又は酸窒化チタンである。チタンブラックは、分散性向上及び凝集性抑制などの目的で必要に応じ、表面を修飾することが可能である。具体的には、チタンブラックの表面は、酸化ケイ素、酸化チタン、酸化ゲルマニウム、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、又は、酸化ジルコニウムで被覆することが可能である。また、チタンブラックの表面は、特開2007-302836号公報に表されるような撥水性物質での処理も可能である。
 チタンブラックは、典型的には、粒子状であり、個々の粒子の一次粒子径が小さいものが好ましい。
Titanium black is black particles containing titanium atoms. Preferred is low-order titanium oxide or titanium oxynitride. The surface of titanium black can be modified as necessary for the purpose of improving dispersibility and suppressing aggregation. Specifically, the surface of titanium black can be coated with silicon oxide, titanium oxide, germanium oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, or zirconium oxide. Further, the surface of titanium black can be treated with a water-repellent substance as disclosed in JP-A-2007-302836.
Titanium black is typically particulate and preferably has a small primary particle size for each particle.
 チタンブラックの比表面積は特に制限されないが、BET法にて測定した値が通常5m/g以上150m/g以下程度であり、20m/g以上120m/g以下であることが好ましい。
 チタンブラックの市販品の例としては、チタンブラック10S、12S、13R、13M、13M-C、13R、13R-N、13M-T(商品名:以上、三菱マテリアル(株)製)、及び、ティラック(Tilack)D(商品名:赤穂化成(株)製)などが挙げられる。
The specific surface area of titanium black is not particularly limited, but the value measured by the BET method is usually about 5 m 2 / g to 150 m 2 / g, and preferably 20 m 2 / g to 120 m 2 / g.
Examples of commercially available titanium black include titanium black 10S, 12S, 13R, 13M, 13M-C, 13R, 13R-N, 13M-T (trade names: above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Corporation), and T For example, Rack D (trade name: manufactured by Ako Kasei Co., Ltd.).
 更に、チタンブラックを、チタンブラック及びSi原子を含む被分散体として含有することも好ましい。
 この形態において、チタンブラックは、組成物中において被分散体として含有されるものであり、被分散体中のSi原子とTi原子との含有比(Si/Ti)が質量換算で0.05以上であることが好ましい。
 ここで、上記被分散体は、チタンブラックが一次粒子の状態であるもの、凝集体(二次粒子)の状態であるものの双方を包含する。
 なお、被分散体中のSi原子とTi原子との含有比(Si/Ti)は、0.5以下であると被分散体を使用した顔料分散物の製造がより容易となるため、その上限は0.5であることが好ましい。
 また、被分散体を使用した遮光膜を光リソグラフィー等によりパターニングした際に、除去部に残渣が残りにくく、遮光能が優れる点で、被分散体のSi/Tiは、0.05以上0.5以下であることがより好ましく、0.07以上0.4以下であることが更に好ましい。
 被分散体のSi/Tiを変更する(例えば、0.05以上とする)ためには、以下のような手段を用いることができる。
 先ず、酸化チタンとシリカ粒子とを分散機を用いて分散することにより混合物を得て、この混合物を高温(例えば、850~1000℃)にて還元処理することにより、チタンブラック粒子を主成分とし、SiとTiとを含有する被分散体を得ることができる。
 ここで、被分散体のSi/Tiを変更するための具体的な態様について説明する。
 Si/Tiが、例えば、0.05以上等に調整されたチタンブラックは、例えば、特開2008-266045公報の段落番号〔0005〕及び段落番号〔0016〕~〔0021〕に記載の方法により作製できる。
Furthermore, it is also preferable to contain titanium black as a dispersion containing titanium black and Si atoms.
In this embodiment, titanium black is contained as a dispersion in the composition, and the content ratio (Si / Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the dispersion is 0.05 or more in terms of mass. It is preferable that
Here, the to-be-dispersed bodies include both those in which titanium black is in the state of primary particles and those in the state of aggregates (secondary particles).
The content ratio (Si / Ti) of Si atoms and Ti atoms in the dispersion is 0.5 or less, which makes it easier to produce a pigment dispersion using the dispersion. Is preferably 0.5.
Further, when the light shielding film using the object to be dispersed is patterned by photolithography or the like, the residue has less residue and the light shielding ability is excellent. It is more preferably 5 or less, and further preferably 0.07 or more and 0.4 or less.
In order to change the Si / Ti of the object to be dispersed (for example, 0.05 or more), the following means can be used.
First, a mixture is obtained by dispersing titanium oxide and silica particles using a disperser, and the mixture is subjected to reduction treatment at a high temperature (for example, 850 to 1000 ° C.) to thereby mainly contain titanium black particles. Thus, a dispersion containing Si and Ti can be obtained.
Here, the specific aspect for changing Si / Ti of a to-be-dispersed body is demonstrated.
Titanium black whose Si / Ti is adjusted to 0.05 or more, for example, is produced by the method described in paragraph numbers [0005] and paragraph numbers [0016] to [0021] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-266045. it can.
 以下、被分散体にSi原子を導入する際には、シリカなどのSi含有物質を用いればよい。
 用いうるシリカとしては、沈降シリカ、フュームドシリカ、コロイダルシリカ、及び、合成シリカなどが挙げられ、これらを適宜選択して使用すればよい。
 チタンブラックは、1種のみを使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
Hereinafter, when Si atoms are introduced into the dispersion, a Si-containing material such as silica may be used.
Examples of silica that can be used include precipitated silica, fumed silica, colloidal silica, and synthetic silica. These may be appropriately selected and used.
Titanium black may use only 1 type and may use 2 or more types.
 前駆体組成物中における顔料の含有量は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、前駆体組成物全質量に対して、5~50質量%が好ましく、10~40質量%がより好ましく、15~35質量%が更に好ましい。 Although the content of the pigment in the precursor composition is not particularly limited, it is preferably 5 to 50% by mass and preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to the total mass of the precursor composition in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. More preferred is 15 to 35% by mass.
<分散剤>
 分散剤は、上述した顔料の分散性向上に寄与する。
 分散剤の酸価は、30~100mgKOH/gが好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、30~90mgKOH/gがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、未吸着の分散剤の量をより低減でき、本発明の効果が有利に得られるほか、予熱処理(工程1)、及び、分散時の加熱処理(工程2)の効果とあいまって、経時での異物(顔料粒子、未吸着の分散剤などの凝集物)の発生しにくくなる。
 分散剤の酸価の算出方法としては、電位差滴定法が挙げられる。すなわち、分散剤を滴定溶剤(例えば、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルと水との9対1混合溶剤)に溶かし、0.1モル/Lの水酸化カリウム水溶液で滴定し、滴定曲線上の変曲点までの滴定量から、酸価を算出できる。
 分散剤の酸価は、例えば、分散剤中における酸基の平均含有量から算出することもできる。
<Dispersant>
A dispersing agent contributes to the dispersibility improvement of the pigment mentioned above.
The acid value of the dispersant is preferably from 30 to 100 mgKOH / g, and more preferably from 30 to 90 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. When the amount is within the above range, the amount of the unadsorbed dispersant can be further reduced, and the effects of the present invention can be advantageously obtained, and the effects of preheating (step 1) and heat treatment during dispersion (step 2) can be obtained. Together, foreign matter (aggregates such as pigment particles and unadsorbed dispersant) is less likely to occur over time.
As a method for calculating the acid value of the dispersant, a potentiometric titration method may be mentioned. That is, the dispersant is dissolved in a titration solvent (for example, 9: 1 mixed solvent of propylene glycol monomethyl ether and water), titrated with a 0.1 mol / L potassium hydroxide aqueous solution, and until the inflection point on the titration curve. The acid value can be calculated from the titration amount.
The acid value of the dispersant can be calculated from, for example, the average content of acid groups in the dispersant.
 分散剤の重量平均分子量は特に制限されないが、GPC(ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィー)法によるポリスチレン換算値として、4,000以上300,000以下であることが好ましく、5,000以上200,000以下であることがより好ましく、6,000以上100,000以下であることが更に好ましく、10,000以上50,000以下であることが特に好ましい。
 GPC法は、HLC-8020GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてTSKgel SuperHZM-H、TSKgel SuperHZ4000、TSKgel SuperHZ2000(東ソー(株)製、4.6mmID×15cm)を、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いる方法に基づく。
The weight average molecular weight of the dispersant is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 4,000 or more and 300,000 or less, and 5,000 or more and 200,000 or less as a polystyrene conversion value by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). More preferably, it is 6,000 or more and 100,000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or more and 50,000 or less.
The GPC method uses HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), TSKgel SuperHZM-H, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperHZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 4.6 mm ID × 15 cm) as columns and THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent. ).
 分散剤としては、公知の顔料分散剤を適宜選択して用いることができる。なかでも、高分子化合物が好ましい。
 分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミン又はその塩、ポリカルボン酸又はその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、及び、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン等が挙げられる。
 高分子化合物は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、及び、ブロック型高分子に分類できる。
As the dispersant, a known pigment dispersant can be appropriately selected and used. Of these, polymer compounds are preferable.
Examples of the dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamines or salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids or salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, modified poly (meth) acrylates, (meth) acrylic types. Copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine and the like.
The polymer compounds can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
 高分子化合物は、顔料等の被分散体の表面に吸着し、これらの再凝集を防止するように作用する。そのため、高分子化合物としては、顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、又は、ブロック型高分子が好ましい。
 一方で、顔料の表面を改質することにより、これらに対する高分子化合物の吸着性を促進させることもできる。
The high molecular compound is adsorbed on the surface of the object to be dispersed such as a pigment and acts to prevent reaggregation of these. Therefore, the polymer compound is preferably a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, or a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface.
On the other hand, by modifying the surface of the pigment, the adsorptivity of the polymer compound to these can be promoted.
 高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位を有することが好ましい。
 このようなグラフト鎖を有する構造単位を有する高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖によって溶剤との親和性が向上するため、顔料の分散性、及び、経時後の分散安定性に優れる。
 グラフト鎖が長くなると立体反発効果が高くなり顔料の分散性は向上するが、グラフト鎖が長すぎると高分子化合物の顔料への吸着力が低下して顔料の分散性は低下する傾向となる。このため、グラフト鎖は、水素原子を除いた原子数が40~10000の範囲であるものが好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が50~2000であるものがより好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が60~500であるものが更に好ましい。
 ここで、グラフト鎖とは、共重合体の主鎖の根元(主鎖から枝分かれしている基において主鎖に結合する原子)から、主鎖から枝分かれしている基の末端までを示す。
The polymer compound preferably has a structural unit having a graft chain.
The polymer compound having a structural unit having such a graft chain is excellent in the dispersibility of the pigment and the dispersion stability after the lapse of time because the affinity with the solvent is improved by the graft chain.
When the graft chain becomes longer, the steric repulsion effect becomes higher and the dispersibility of the pigment is improved. However, when the graft chain is too long, the adsorptive power of the polymer compound to the pigment is lowered and the dispersibility of the pigment tends to be lowered. Therefore, the graft chain preferably has a number of atoms excluding hydrogen atoms in the range of 40 to 10,000, more preferably a number of atoms excluding hydrogen atoms of 50 to 2000, and atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. More preferably, the number is from 60 to 500.
Here, the graft chain means from the base of the main chain of the copolymer (the atom bonded to the main chain in a group branched from the main chain) to the end of the group branched from the main chain.
 グラフト鎖は、ポリマー構造を有することが好ましく、このようなポリマー構造としては、例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリレート構造(例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造)、ポリエステル構造、ポリウレタン構造、ポリウレア構造、ポリアミド構造、及び、ポリエーテル構造などが挙げられる。
 グラフト鎖と溶剤との相互作用性を向上させ、それにより顔料の分散性を高めるために、グラフト鎖は、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造及びポリ(メタ)アクリレート構造からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を有するグラフト鎖であることが好ましく、ポリエステル構造及びポリエーテル構造の少なくともいずれかを有するグラフト鎖であることがより好ましい。
The graft chain preferably has a polymer structure. Examples of such a polymer structure include a poly (meth) acrylate structure (for example, a poly (meth) acrylic structure), a polyester structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide structure. And a polyether structure.
In order to improve the interaction between the graft chain and the solvent, thereby increasing the dispersibility of the pigment, the graft chain is at least one selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure and a poly (meth) acrylate structure. A graft chain having a seed is preferable, and a graft chain having at least one of a polyester structure and a polyether structure is more preferable.
 このようなポリマー構造をグラフト鎖として有するマクロモノマーとしては、特に制限されないが、反応性二重結合性基を有するマクロモノマーが好ましい。 The macromonomer having such a polymer structure as a graft chain is not particularly limited, but a macromonomer having a reactive double bond group is preferable.
 高分子化合物が有するグラフト鎖を有する構造単位に対応し、高分子化合物の合成に好適に用いられる市販のマクロモノマーとしては、AA-6(商品名、東亜合成(株))、AA-10(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AB-6(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AS-6(商品名、東亜合成(株))、AN-6(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AW-6(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AA-714(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AY-707(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AY-714(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AK-5(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AK-30(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AK-32(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、ブレンマーPP-100(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマーPP-500(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマーPP-800(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマーPP-1000(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマー55-PET-800(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマーPME-4000(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマーPSE-400(商品名、日油(株)製)、ブレンマーPSE-1300(商品名、日油(株)製)、及び、ブレンマー43PAPE-600B(商品名、日油(株)製)などが挙げられる。なかでも、AA-6(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AA-10(商品名、東亜合成(株))、AB-6(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、AS-6(商品名、東亜合成(株))、AN-6(商品名、東亜合成(株)製)、又は、ブレンマーPME-4000(商品名、日油(株)製)などが好ましい。 Corresponding to the structural unit having a graft chain of the polymer compound, commercially available macromonomers suitably used for the synthesis of the polymer compound include AA-6 (trade name, Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-10 ( Product name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AB-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AS-6 (trade name, produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AN-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.) Co., Ltd.), AW-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-714 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AY-707 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AY-714 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AK-5 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AK-30 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AK-32 (product) Name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), Blemmer PP-100 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), Blemmer PP-500 ( Product name, NOF Corporation), BLEMMER PP-800 (trade name, NOF Corporation), BLEMMER PP-1000 (trade name, NOF Corporation), BLEMMER 55-PET-800 (product) Name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), BREMMER PME-4000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), BREMMER PSE-400 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), Blemmer PSE-1300 (trade name, NOF Corp.) and BLEMMER 43PAPE-600B (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corp.). Among them, AA-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-10 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AB-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AS-6 (Trade name, Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AN-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), or Bremer PME-4000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation) is preferred.
(好適態様1)
 高分子化合物(分散剤)は、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位として、下記式(1)~式(4)のいずれかで表される構造単位を含むことが好ましく、下記式(1A)、下記式(2A)、下記式(3A)、下記式(3B)、及び下記(4)のいずれかで表される構造単位を含むことがより好ましい。
(Preferred embodiment 1)
The polymer compound (dispersant) preferably includes a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas (1) to (4) as a structural unit having a graft chain. More preferably, it includes a structural unit represented by any one of (2A), the following formula (3A), the following formula (3B), and the following (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(1)~式(4)において、W、W、W、及びWは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又はNHを表す。W、W、W、及びWは、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(1)~式(4)において、X、X、X、X、及びXは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。X、X、X、X、及びXとしては、合成上の制約の観点からは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~12のアルキル基であることが好ましく、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基であることが更に好ましい。
In the formulas (1) to (4), W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH. W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 are preferably oxygen atoms.
In the formulas (1) to (4), X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of synthesis constraints. Further, a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group is still more preferable.
 式(1)~式(4)において、Y、Y、Y、及びYは、それぞれ独立に、2価の連結基を表し、連結基は特に構造上制約されない。Y、Y、Y、及びYで表される2価の連結基として、具体的には、下記の(Y-1)~(Y-21)の連結基などが挙げられる。下記に示した構造において、A及びBはそれぞれ、式(1)~式(4)における左末端基及び右末端基との結合部位を意味する。下記に示した構造のうち、合成の簡便性から、(Y-2)又は(Y-13)の連結基が好ましい。 In the formulas (1) to (4), Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group, and the linking group is not particularly limited in structure. Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 include the following (Y-1) to (Y-21) linking groups. In the structures shown below, A and B mean binding sites with the left end group and the right end group in formulas (1) to (4), respectively. Of the structures shown below, a linking group of (Y-2) or (Y-13) is preferred from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(1)~式(4)において、Z、Z、Z、及びZは、それぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表す。有機基の種類は特に制限されないが、具体的には、アルキル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基、及び、アミノ基などが挙げられる。なかでも、Z、Z、Z、及びZで表される有機基としては、特に顔料の分散性向上の観点から、立体反発効果を有するものが好ましく、それぞれ独立に、炭素数5から24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基が好ましく、炭素数5から24の分岐状アルキル基、炭素数5から24の環状アルキル基、又は、炭素数5から24のアルコキシ基がより好ましい。なお、アルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよい。 In the formulas (1) to (4), Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 each independently represent a monovalent organic group. The type of the organic group is not particularly limited, and specific examples include an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, and an amino group. Is mentioned. Among these, as the organic group represented by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 , those having a steric repulsion effect are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment, and each independently has 5 carbon atoms. To 24 alkyl groups or alkoxy groups are preferable, and branched alkyl groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, cyclic alkyl groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, or alkoxy groups having 5 to 24 carbon atoms are more preferable. The alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
 式(1)~式(4)において、n、m、p、及びqは、それぞれ独立に、1~500の整数である。
 また、式(1)及び式(2)において、j及びkは、それぞれ独立に、2~8の整数を表す。式(1)及び式(2)におけるj及びkは、顔料の分散安定性の観点から、4~6の整数が好ましく、5がより好ましい。
In the formulas (1) to (4), n, m, p, and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 500.
In the formulas (1) and (2), j and k each independently represent an integer of 2 to 8. J and k in the formulas (1) and (2) are preferably integers of 4 to 6, and more preferably 5, from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment.
 式(3)中、Rは分岐又は直鎖のアルキレン基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキレン基がより好ましい。pが2~500のとき、複数存在するRは互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
 式(4)中、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、この1価の有機基の種類は特に制限されない。Rとしては、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又は、ヘテロアリール基が好ましく、水素原子、又はアルキル基がより好ましい。Rがアルキル基である場合、アルキル基としては、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~20の分岐状アルキル基、又は炭素数5~20の環状アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖状アルキル基が更に好ましい。式(4)において、qが2~500のとき、グラフト共重合体中に複数存在するX及びRは互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
In formula (3), R 3 represents a branched or straight chain alkylene group, preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. When p is 2 to 500, a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different from each other.
In formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and the type of the monovalent organic group is not particularly limited. R 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. When R 4 is an alkyl group, the alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, A linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is still more preferable. In the formula (4), when q is 2 to 500, a plurality of X 5 and R 4 present in the graft copolymer may be the same or different from each other.
 また、高分子化合物は、2種以上の構造が異なる、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位を有することができる。即ち、高分子化合物の分子中に、互いに構造の異なる式(1)~式(4)で示される構造単位を含んでいてもよく、また、式(1)~式(4)においてn、m、p、及びqがそれぞれ2以上の整数を表す場合、式(1)及び式(2)においては、側鎖中にj及びkが互いに異なる構造を含んでいてもよく、式(3)及び式(4)においては、分子内に複数存在するR、R及びXは互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。 In addition, the polymer compound may have a structural unit having a graft chain, which has two or more different structures. That is, the polymer compound molecule may contain structural units represented by formulas (1) to (4) having different structures, and n, m in formulas (1) to (4). , P, and q each represent an integer of 2 or more, in formula (1) and formula (2), j and k may contain structures different from each other in the side chain. In the formula (4), a plurality of R 3 , R 4 and X 5 present in the molecule may be the same or different from each other.
 式(1)で表される構造単位としては、顔料の分散安定性の観点から、下記式(1A)で表される構造単位が好ましい。
 また、式(2)で表される構造単位としては、顔料の分散安定性の観点から、下記式(2A)で表される構造単位が好ましい。
The structural unit represented by the formula (1) is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (1A) from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment.
Moreover, as a structural unit represented by Formula (2), the structural unit represented by following formula (2A) is preferable from a viewpoint of the dispersion stability of a pigment.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(1A)中、X、Y、Z及びnは、式(1)におけるX、Y、Z及びnと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。式(2A)中、X、Y、Z及びmは、式(2)におけるX、Y、Z及びmと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 Wherein (1A), X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n are as defined X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n in Formula (1), and preferred ranges are also the same. Wherein (2A), X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m are as defined X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m in the formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 また、式(3)で表される構造単位としては、顔料の分散安定性の観点から、下記式(3A)又は式(3B)で表される構造単位が好ましい。 The structural unit represented by the formula (3) is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (3A) or (3B) from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式(3A)又は(3B)中、X、Y、Z及びpは、式(3)におけるX、Y、Z及びpと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 Wherein (3A) or (3B), X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p are as defined X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p in formula (3), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位として、式(1A)で表される構造単位を有することがより好ましい。 More preferably, the polymer compound has a structural unit represented by the formula (1A) as a structural unit having a graft chain.
 高分子化合物において、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位(例えば、上記式(1)~式(4)で表される構造単位)は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、2~90%の範囲で含まれることが好ましく、5~30%の範囲で含まれることがより好ましい。グラフト鎖を有する構造単位が、この範囲内で含まれると顔料(特に、チタンブラック)の分散性が高い。 In the polymer compound, the structural unit having a graft chain (for example, the structural unit represented by the above formulas (1) to (4)) is 2 to 90 relative to the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass. % Is preferably included, and more preferably in the range of 5 to 30%. When the structural unit having a graft chain is contained within this range, the dispersibility of the pigment (particularly titanium black) is high.
 また、高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位とは異なる(すなわち、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位には相当しない)疎水性構造単位を有することが好ましい。ただし、本発明において、疎水性構造単位は、酸基(例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、又は、フェノール性水酸基等)を有さない構造単位である。 Further, the polymer compound preferably has a hydrophobic structural unit different from the structural unit having a graft chain (that is, not corresponding to the structural unit having a graft chain). However, in the present invention, the hydrophobic structural unit is a structural unit having no acid group (for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group).
 疎水性構造単位は、好ましくは、ClogP値が1.2以上の化合物(モノマー)に由来する(対応する)構造単位であり、より好ましくは、ClogP値が1.2~8の化合物に由来する構造単位である。これにより、本発明の効果をより確実に発現できる。 The hydrophobic structural unit is preferably a structural unit derived from (corresponding to) a compound (monomer) having a ClogP value of 1.2 or more, more preferably derived from a compound having a ClogP value of 1.2 to 8. A structural unit. Thereby, the effect of this invention can be expressed more reliably.
 ClogP値は、Daylight Chemical Information System, Inc.から入手できるプログラム“CLOGP”で計算された値である。このプログラムは、Hansch, Leoのフラグメントアプローチ(下記文献参照)により算出される“計算logP”の値を提供する。フラグメントアプローチは化合物の化学構造に基づいており、化学構造を部分構造(フラグメント)に分割し、そのフラグメントに対して割り当てられたlogP寄与分を合計することにより化合物のlogP値を推算している。その詳細は以下の文献に記載されている。本発明では、プログラムCLOGP v4.82により計算したClogP値を用いる。
 A. J. Leo, Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol.4, C. Hansch, P. G. Sammnens, J. B. Taylor and C. A. Ramsden, Eds., p.295, Pergamon Press, 1990 C. Hansch & A. J. Leo. SUbstituent Constants For Correlation Analysis in Chemistry and Biology. John Wiley & Sons. A.J. Leo. Calculating logPoct from structure. Chem. Rev., 93, 1281-1306, 1993.
ClogP values can be obtained from Daylight Chemical Information System, Inc. It is a value calculated by the program “CLOGP” available from This program provides the value of “computation logP” calculated by Hansch, Leo's fragment approach (see below). The fragment approach is based on the chemical structure of a compound, which divides the chemical structure into substructures (fragments) and estimates the logP value of the compound by summing the logP contributions assigned to that fragment. Details thereof are described in the following documents. In the present invention, the ClogP value calculated by the program CLOGP v4.82 is used.
A. J. et al. Leo, Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C.I. Hansch, P.A. G. Sammunens, J. et al. B. Taylor and C.M. A. Ramsden, Eds. , P. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990 C.I. Hansch & A. J. et al. Leo. Substituent Constants For Correlation Analysis in Chemistry and Biology. John Wiley & Sons. A. J. et al. Leo. Calculating logPoch from structure. Chem. Rev. , 93, 1281-1306, 1993.
 logPは、分配係数P(Partition Coefficient)の常用対数を意味し、ある有機化合物が油(一般的には1-オクタノール)と水の2相系の平衡でどのように分配されるかを定量的な数値として表す物性値であり、以下の式で示される。
  logP=log(Coil/Cwater)
 式中、Coilは油相中の化合物のモル濃度を、Cwaterは水相中の化合物のモル濃度を表す。
 logPの値が0をはさんでプラスに大きくなると油溶性が増し、マイナスで絶対値が大きくなると水溶性が増すことを意味し、有機化合物の水溶性と負の相関があり、有機化合物の親疎水性を見積るパラメータとして広く利用されている。
logP means the common logarithm of the partition coefficient P (Partition Coefficient), and quantitatively determines how an organic compound is distributed in the equilibrium of a two-phase system of oil (generally 1-octanol) and water. It is a physical property value expressed as a numerical value, and is represented by the following formula.
logP = log (Coil / Cwater)
In the formula, Coil represents the molar concentration of the compound in the oil phase, and Cwater represents the molar concentration of the compound in the aqueous phase.
When the logP value increases to a positive value across 0, the oil solubility increases. When the logP value increases to a negative value, the water solubility increases. There is a negative correlation with the water solubility of the organic compound. It is widely used as a parameter for estimating aqueous properties.
 高分子化合物は、疎水性構造単位として、下記一般式(i)~(iii)で表される単量体に由来の構造単位から選択された1種以上の構造単位を有することが好ましい。 The polymer compound preferably has one or more structural units selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (i) to (iii) as hydrophobic structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 上記一般式(i)~(iii)中、R、R、及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子等)、又は、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)を表す。
 R、R、及びRは、水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子又はメチル基であることがより好ましい。R及びRは、水素原子であることが更に好ましい。
 Xは、酸素原子(-O-)又はイミノ基(-NH-)を表し、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
In the general formulas (i) to (iii), R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom), or An alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.) is represented.
R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 2 and R 3 are more preferably a hydrogen atom.
X represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
 Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基である。2価の連結基としては、2価の脂肪族基(例えば、アルキレン基、置換アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、置換アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、及び、置換アルキニレン基)、2価の芳香族基(例えば、アリーレン基、及び、置換アリーレン基)、2価の複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ基(-NR31-、ここでR31は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、又は、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 L is a single bond or a divalent linking group. As the divalent linking group, a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (for example, Arylene group and substituted arylene group), divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, Here, R 31 includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl group (—CO—), or a combination thereof.
 2価の脂肪族基は、分岐状でも環状でもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基であっても飽和脂肪族基であってもよいが、飽和脂肪族基であることが好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、芳香族基及び複素環基等が挙げられる。 The divalent aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group may be an unsaturated aliphatic group or a saturated aliphatic group, but is preferably a saturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基等が挙げられる。 The carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R32、ここでR32は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle. Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring. Moreover, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group (═O), a thioxo group (═S), an imino group (═NH), a substituted imino group (═N—R 32 , where R 32 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, and heterocyclic group.
 Lは、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、オキシアルキレン構造を含む2価の連結基であることが好ましい。オキシアルキレン構造は、オキシエチレン構造又はオキシプロピレン構造であることが好ましい。また、Lは、オキシアルキレン構造を2以上繰り返して含むポリオキシアルキレン構造を含んでいてもよい。ポリオキシアルキレン構造としては、ポリオキシエチレン構造又はポリオキシプロピレン構造が好ましい。ポリオキシエチレン構造は、-(OCHCH)n-で表され、nは、2以上の整数が好ましく、2~10の整数がより好ましい。 L is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure. The oxyalkylene structure is preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure. L may contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures. The polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure. The polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 Zとしては、脂肪族基(例えば、アルキル基、置換アルキル基、不飽和アルキル基、及び、置換不飽和アルキル基、)、芳香族基(例えば、アリール基、及び、置換アリール基)、又は、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。なお、上記各基には、複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ基(-NR31-、ここでR31は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基を表す。)、又は、カルボニル基(-CO-)が含まれていてもよい。 Z is an aliphatic group (for example, an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, an unsaturated alkyl group, and a substituted unsaturated alkyl group), an aromatic group (for example, an aryl group and a substituted aryl group), or The group which combined these is mentioned. Each of the above groups includes a heterocyclic group, an oxygen atom (—O—), a sulfur atom (—S—), an imino group (—NH—), a substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, wherein R 31 represents Represents an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), or may contain a carbonyl group (—CO—).
 脂肪族基は、分岐状でも環状でもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基には、環集合炭化水素基、及び、架橋環式炭化水素基が含まれ、環集合炭化水素基としては、ビシクロヘキシル基、パーヒドロナフタレニル基、ビフェニル基、及び、4-シクロヘキシルフェニル基などが挙げられる。架橋環式炭化水素環としては、ピナン、ボルナン、ノルピナン、ノルボルナン、ビシクロオクタン環(ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン環、及び、ビシクロ[3.2.1]オクタン環等)などの2環式炭化水素環、ホモブレダン、アダマンタン、トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカン、及び、トリシクロ[4.3.1.12,5]ウンデカン環などの3環式炭化水素環、並びに、テトラシクロ[4.4.0.12,5.17,10]ドデカン、及び、パーヒドロ-1,4-メタノ-5,8-メタノナフタレン環などの4環式炭化水素環などが挙げられる。また、架橋環式炭化水素環には、縮合環式炭化水素環、例えば、パーヒドロナフタレン(デカリン)、パーヒドロアントラセン、パーヒドロフェナントレン、パーヒドロアセナフテン、パーヒドロフルオレン、パーヒドロインデン、及び、パーヒドロフェナレン環などの5~8員シクロアルカン環が複数個縮合した縮合環も含まれる。
 脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基よりも飽和脂肪族基の方が好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。ただし、脂肪族基は、置換基として酸基を有さない。
The aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group includes a ring assembly hydrocarbon group and a bridged cyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the ring assembly hydrocarbon group include a bicyclohexyl group, a perhydronaphthalenyl group, a biphenyl group, and 4- Examples thereof include a cyclohexylphenyl group. The bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring includes two rings such as pinane, bornane, norpinane, norbornane, bicyclooctane ring (bicyclo [2.2.2] octane ring, bicyclo [3.2.1] octane ring, etc.) A tricyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a formula hydrocarbon ring, homobredan, adamantane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane, and tricyclo [4.3.1.1 2,5 ] undecane ring, And tetracyclo [4.4.0.1 2,5 . 1 7,10 ] dodecane, and tetracyclic hydrocarbon rings such as perhydro-1,4-methano-5,8-methanonaphthalene ring. The bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring includes a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring, such as perhydronaphthalene (decalin), perhydroanthracene, perhydrophenanthrene, perhydroacenaphthene, perhydrofluorene, perhydroindene, and A condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed, such as a perhydrophenalene ring, is also included.
The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aliphatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
 芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。ただし、芳香族基は、置換基として酸基を有さない。 The carbon number of the aromatic group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-15, and still more preferably 6-10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aromatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
 複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R32、ここでR32は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。ただし、複素環基は、置換基として酸基を有さない。 The heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle. Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring. Moreover, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group (═O), a thioxo group (═S), an imino group (═NH), a substituted imino group (═N—R 32 , where R 32 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, and heterocyclic group. However, the heterocyclic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
 上記式(iii)中、R、R、及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等)、炭素数1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)、Z、又は-L-Zを表す。ここでL及びZは、上記におけるものと同義である。R、R、及びRとしては、水素原子、又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In the above formula (iii), R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms ( For example, it represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), Z, or -LZ. Here, L and Z are as defined above. R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 本発明においては、上記一般式(i)で表される単量体として、R、R、及びRが水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lが単結合又はアルキレン基若しくはオキシアルキレン構造を含む2価の連結基であって、Xが酸素原子又はイミノ基であって、Zが脂肪族基、複素環基又は芳香族基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、上記一般式(ii)で表される単量体として、Rが水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基であって、Zが脂肪族基、複素環基又は芳香族基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、上記一般式(iii)で表される単量体として、R、R、及びRが水素原子又はメチル基であって、Zが脂肪族基、複素環基又は芳香族基である化合物が好ましい。
In the present invention, as the monomer represented by the general formula (i), R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L is a single bond, an alkylene group, or an oxyalkylene structure. A compound in which X is an oxygen atom or an imino group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group is preferable.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (ii), R 1 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L is an alkylene group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group. Is preferred.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (iii), R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group, or an aromatic group. Certain compounds are preferred.
 一般式(i)~(iii)で表される代表的な化合物としては、アクリル酸エステル類、メタクリル酸エステル類、及び、スチレン類などから選ばれるラジカル重合性化合物が挙げられる。
 なお、一般式(i)~(iii)で表される代表的な化合物としては、特開2013-249417号公報の段落0089~0093に記載の化合物を参照でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Representative compounds represented by the general formulas (i) to (iii) include radical polymerizable compounds selected from acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrenes, and the like.
As typical compounds represented by the general formulas (i) to (iii), the compounds described in paragraphs 0089 to 0093 of JP2013-249417A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in this specification. Incorporated.
 高分子化合物において、疎水性構造単位は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対し10~90%の範囲で含まれることが好ましく、20~80%の範囲で含まれることがより好ましい。含有量が上記範囲において十分なパターン形成が得られる。 In the polymer compound, the hydrophobic structural unit is preferably contained in a range of 10 to 90%, more preferably in a range of 20 to 80% with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass. When the content is in the above range, sufficient pattern formation can be obtained.
 高分子化合物は、顔料(特に、チタンブラック)と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を有することができる。ここで、高分子化合物は、顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を有する構造単位を更に有することが好ましい。
 この顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基としては、例えば、酸基、塩基性基、配位性基、及び、反応性を有する官能基等が挙げられる。
 高分子化合物が、酸基、塩基性基、配位性基、又は、反応性を有する官能基を有する場合、それぞれ、酸基を有する構造単位、塩基性基を有する構造単位、配位性基を有する構造単位、又は、反応性を有する構造単位を有することが好ましい。
 また、高分子化合物が酸基を有する構造単位を有することにより、高分子化合物が溶剤となじみやすくなり、塗布性も向上する傾向となる。
 これは、酸基を有する構造単位における酸基が顔料と相互作用しやすく、高分子化合物が顔料を安定的に分散すると共に、顔料を分散する高分子化合物の粘度が低くなっており、高分子化合物自体も安定的に分散されやすいためであると推測される。
The polymer compound may have a functional group that can form an interaction with a pigment (particularly titanium black). Here, the polymer compound preferably further has a structural unit having a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment.
Examples of the functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment include an acid group, a basic group, a coordination group, and a reactive functional group.
When the polymer compound has an acid group, a basic group, a coordinating group, or a reactive functional group, the structural unit having an acid group, the structural unit having a basic group, or a coordinating group, respectively. It is preferable to have a structural unit having or a structural unit having reactivity.
Moreover, when a high molecular compound has a structural unit which has an acid group, it becomes easy for a high molecular compound to become compatible with a solvent, and it exists in the tendency for applicability | paintability to improve.
This is because the acid group in the structural unit having an acid group easily interacts with the pigment, the polymer compound stably disperses the pigment, and the viscosity of the polymer compound that disperses the pigment is low. It is presumed that the compound itself is also easily dispersed stably.
 ただし、酸基としてのアルカリ可溶性基を有する構造単位は、上記したグラフト鎖を有する構造単位と同一の構造単位であっても、異なる構造単位であってもよいが、酸基としてのアルカリ可溶性基を有する構造単位は、上記した疎水性構造単位とは異なる構造単位である(すなわち、上記した疎水性構造単位には相当しない)。 However, the structural unit having an alkali-soluble group as an acid group may be the same structural unit as the above-described structural unit having a graft chain or a different structural unit. Is a structural unit different from the hydrophobic structural unit described above (that is, does not correspond to the hydrophobic structural unit described above).
 顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基である酸基としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、又は、フェノール性水酸基などがあり、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基のうち少なくとも1種が好ましく、顔料への吸着力が良好で、且つ、顔料の分散性が高い点で、カルボン酸基がより好ましい。
 すなわち、高分子化合物は、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基のうち少なくとも1種を有する構造単位を更に有することが好ましい。
Examples of the acid group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and At least one of phosphoric acid groups is preferable, and a carboxylic acid group is more preferable in terms of good adsorbing power to the pigment and high dispersibility of the pigment.
That is, the polymer compound preferably further has a structural unit having at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
 高分子化合物は、酸基を有する構造単位を1種又は2種以上有してもよい。
 高分子化合物は、酸基を有する構造単位を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、酸基を有する構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、5~80%が好ましく、アルカリ現像による画像強度のダメージ抑制という点から、10~60%がより好ましい。
The polymer compound may have one or more structural units having an acid group.
The polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit having an acid group, but when it is contained, the content of the structural unit having an acid group is calculated in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound. 5 to 80% is preferable, and 10 to 60% is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing damage of image strength due to alkali development.
 顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基である塩基性基としては、例えば、第1級アミノ基、第2級アミノ基、第3級アミノ基、N原子を含むヘテロ環、及び、アミド基などがあり、顔料への吸着力が良好で、且つ、顔料の分散性が高い点で、第3級アミノ基が好ましい。高分子化合物は、これらの塩基性基を1種又は2種以上有することができる。
 高分子化合物は、塩基性基を有する構造単位を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、塩基性基を有する構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、0.01~50%が好ましく、現像性阻害抑制という点から、0.01~30%がより好ましい。
Examples of the basic group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment include a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, a tertiary amino group, a heterocyclic ring containing an N atom, and an amide group. Tertiary amino groups are preferred because they have good adsorption power to the pigment and high dispersibility of the pigment. The polymer compound can have one or more of these basic groups.
The polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit having a basic group, but when it is contained, the content of the structural unit having a basic group is calculated by mass conversion to the total mass of the polymer compound. On the other hand, 0.01 to 50% is preferable, and 0.01 to 30% is more preferable from the viewpoint of inhibiting the development inhibition.
 顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基である配位性基、及び反応性を有する官能基としては、例えば、アセチルアセトキシ基、トリアルコキシシリル基、イソシアネート基、酸無水物、及び、酸塩化物などが挙げられる。なかでも、顔料への吸着力が良好で、かつ、顔料の分散性が高い点で、アセチルアセトキシ基が好ましい。高分子化合物は、これらの基を1種又は2種以上有してもよい。
 高分子化合物は、配位性基を有する構造単位、又は、反応性を有する官能基を有する構造単位を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、これらの構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、10~80%以下が好ましく、現像性阻害抑制という点から、20~60%がより好ましい。
Examples of the coordinating group, which is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment, and the reactive functional group include acetylacetoxy group, trialkoxysilyl group, isocyanate group, acid anhydride, and acid chloride Etc. Of these, an acetylacetoxy group is preferred because it has a good adsorptive power to the pigment and has a high dispersibility of the pigment. The polymer compound may have one or more of these groups.
The polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit having a coordinating group or a structural unit having a reactive functional group, but when it is contained, the content of these structural units is: In terms of mass, it is preferably 10 to 80% or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound, and more preferably 20 to 60% from the viewpoint of inhibiting developability inhibition.
 高分子化合物が、グラフト鎖以外に、顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を有する場合、下記一般式(iv)~(vi)で表される単量体に由来の構造単位から選択された1種以上の構造単位を有することが好ましい。 When the polymer compound has a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment in addition to the graft chain, the polymer compound was selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (iv) to (vi) It is preferable to have one or more structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)中、R11、R12、及びR13は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子等)、又は炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等)を表す。
 一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)中、R11、R12、及びR13は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基がより好ましい。一般式(iv)中、R12及びR13は、それぞれ水素原子であることが更に好ましい。
In general formula (iv) to general formula (vi), R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom), or An alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.) is represented.
In general formula (iv) to general formula (vi), R 11 , R 12 and R 13 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and each independently represents a hydrogen atom or A methyl group is more preferred. In general formula (iv), R 12 and R 13 are each more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(iv)中のXは、酸素原子(-O-)又はイミノ基(-NH-)を表し、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 また、一般式(v)中のYは、メチン基又は窒素原子を表す。
X 1 in the general formula (iv) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
Y in the general formula (v) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
 また、一般式(iv)~一般式(v)中のLは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、2価の脂肪族基(例えば、アルキレン基、置換アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、置換アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、及び、置換アルキニレン基)、2価の芳香族基(例えば、アリーレン基、及び、置換アリーレン基)、2価の複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ結合(-NR31’-、ここでR31’は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、カルボニル結合(-CO-)、又は、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 In the general formulas (iv) to (v), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. As the divalent linking group, a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (for example, Arylene group and substituted arylene group), divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino bond (—NR 31 ′ —) Here, R 31 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), or a combination thereof.
 2価の脂肪族基は、分岐状でも環状でもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基よりも飽和脂肪族基の方が好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、芳香族基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、脂肪族基、芳香族基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。 The carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環のうち1つ以上が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R32、ここでR32は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle. One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle. Moreover, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group (═O), a thioxo group (═S), an imino group (═NH), a substituted imino group (═N—R 32 , where R 32 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, and heterocyclic group.
 Lは、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、オキシアルキレン構造を含む2価の連結基であることが好ましい。オキシアルキレン構造は、オキシエチレン構造又はオキシプロピレン構造であることが好ましい。また、Lは、オキシアルキレン構造を2以上繰り返して含むポリオキシアルキレン構造を含んでいてもよい。ポリオキシアルキレン構造としては、ポリオキシエチレン構造又はポリオキシプロピレン構造が好ましい。ポリオキシエチレン構造は、-(OCHCH)n-で表され、nは、2以上の整数が好ましく、2~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 L 1 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure. The oxyalkylene structure is preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure. L 1 may also contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures. The polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure. The polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)中、Zは、グラフト鎖以外に顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を表し、カルボン酸基、又は、第3級アミノ基であることが好ましく、カルボン酸基であることがより好ましい。 In general formula (iv) to general formula (vi), Z 1 represents a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment other than the graft chain, and is preferably a carboxylic acid group or a tertiary amino group. More preferably, it is a carboxylic acid group.
 一般式(vi)中、R14、R15、及びR16は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子等)、炭素数1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等)、-Z、又は-L-Zを表す。ここでL及びZは、上記におけるL及びZと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。R14、R15、及びR16としては、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In the general formula (vi), R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), an alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. group (e.g., methyl group, ethyl group, and propyl group), - represents a Z 1, or -L 1 -Z 1. Wherein L 1 and Z 1 are the same meaning as L 1 and Z 1 in the above, it is the preferable examples. R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(iv)で表される単量体として、R11、R12、及びR13がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含む2価の連結基であって、Xが酸素原子又はイミノ基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、一般式(v)で表される単量体として、R11が水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基であって、Zがカルボン酸基であって、Yがメチン基である化合物が好ましい。
 更に、一般式(vi)で表される単量体として、R14、R15、及びR16がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lが単結合又はアルキレン基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
As the monomer represented by the general formula (iv), R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 1 is a divalent alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure. A compound in which X is an oxygen atom or imino group and Z is a carboxylic acid group is preferred as a linking group.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (v), R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L 1 is an alkylene group, Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group, and Y is methine. Compounds that are groups are preferred.
Furthermore, as a monomer represented by the general formula (vi), R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L is a single bond or an alkylene group, and Z A compound in which is a carboxylic acid group is preferred.
 以下に、一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)で表される単量体(化合物)の代表的な例を示す。
 単量体の例としては、メタクリル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を有する化合物(例えば、メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル)とコハク酸無水物との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を有する化合物とフタル酸無水物との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を有する化合物とテトラヒドロキシフタル酸無水物との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を有する化合物と無水トリメリット酸との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を有する化合物とピロメリット酸無水物との反応物、アクリル酸、アクリル酸ダイマー、アクリル酸オリゴマー、マレイン酸、イタコン酸、フマル酸、4-ビニル安息香酸、ビニルフェノール、及び、4-ヒドロキシフェニルメタクリルアミドなどが挙げられる。
The following are typical examples of monomers (compounds) represented by general formula (iv) to general formula (vi).
Examples of monomers include methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule (for example, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate) and succinic anhydride. , A reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule with phthalic anhydride, a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and tetrahydroxyphthalic anhydride , A reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and trimellitic anhydride, a reaction product of a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and pyromellitic anhydride, Acrylic acid, acrylic acid dimer, acrylic acid oligomer, maleic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, vinylphenol, and 4-hydroxy Phenyl methacrylamide.
 顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を有する構造単位の含有量は、顔料の分散安定性の点から、高分子化合物の全質量に対して、0.05~90質量%が好ましく、1.0~80質量%がより好ましく、10~70質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the structural unit having a functional group capable of forming an interaction with the pigment is preferably 0.05 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the pigment. 0 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 10 to 70% by mass is still more preferable.
 更に、高分子化合物は、諸性能を向上する目的で、本発明の効果を損なわない限りにおいて、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位、疎水性構造単位、及び、顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を有する構造単位とは異なる、種々の機能を有する他の構造単位(例えば、分散物に用いられる分散媒との親和性を有する官能基などを有する構造単位)を更に有していてもよい。
 このような、他の構造単位としては、例えば、アクリロニトリル類、及び、メタクリロニトリル類などから選ばれるラジカル重合性化合物に由来の構造単位が挙げられる。
 高分子化合物は、これらの他の構造単位を1種又は2種以上含んでいてもよく、その含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、0~80%が好ましく、10~60%がより好ましい。
Furthermore, for the purpose of improving various performances, the polymer compound has a structural unit having a graft chain, a hydrophobic structural unit, and a functional group capable of interacting with a pigment, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. You may further have other structural units (for example, a structural unit which has a functional group etc. which have affinity with the dispersion medium used for a dispersion) different from the structural unit which has various functions.
Examples of such other structural units include structural units derived from radical polymerizable compounds selected from acrylonitriles and methacrylonitriles.
The polymer compound may contain one or more of these other structural units, and its content is preferably 0 to 80% based on the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass, 10 to 60% is more preferable.
(好適態様2)
 分散剤の他の好適態様としては、一般式(X)で表される高分子化合物Xが挙げられる。
 以下、一般式(X)における各基について詳細に説明する。
 なお、高分子化合物Xが有する、置換基A1は顔料と相互作用できるので、高分子化合物Xはn個(1~9個)の置換基A1を有することにより顔料と強固に相互作用できる。また、高分子化合物Xがm個有するポリマー鎖P1は立体反発基として機能し、m個有することにより良好な立体反発力を発揮して顔料を均一に分散できる。
(Preferred embodiment 2)
As another suitable aspect of a dispersing agent, the high molecular compound X represented by general formula (X) is mentioned.
Hereinafter, each group in the general formula (X) will be described in detail.
Since the substituent A 1 of the polymer compound X can interact with the pigment, the polymer compound X can strongly interact with the pigment by having n (1 to 9) substituents A 1. . In addition, m polymer chains P 1 of the polymer compound X function as steric repulsion groups, and by having m, the polymer can exhibit uniform steric repulsive force and uniformly disperse the pigment.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 上記一般式(X)中、Aは、酸基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、フェノール基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキレンオキシ鎖を有する基、イミド基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシシリル基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基、水酸基、又は、複素環基のような顔料に対する吸着能を有する官能基を表す。
 なお、以下、この顔料に対する吸着能を有する部位(上記官能基)を、適宜、「吸着部位」と総称して、説明する。
In the general formula (X), A 1 is an acid group, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a phenol group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an alkyleneoxy chain. Adsorption ability for pigments such as imide groups, imide groups, alkyloxycarbonyl groups, alkylaminocarbonyl groups, carboxylate groups, sulfonamido groups, alkoxysilyl groups, epoxy groups, isocyanate groups, hydroxyl groups, or heterocyclic groups Represents a functional group possessed.
Hereinafter, the site having the ability to adsorb to the pigment (the above functional group) will be described as an “adsorption site” as appropriate.
 吸着部位は、1つのAの中に、少なくとも1個含まれていればよく、2個以上含まれていてもよい。
 1つのAの中に、2個以上の吸着部位が含まれる態様としては、例えば、鎖状飽和炭化水素基(直鎖状でも分岐状であってもよく、炭素数1~10が好ましい)、環状飽和炭化水素基(炭素数3~10が好ましい)、芳香族基(炭素数5~10が好ましく、例えば、フェニレン基)等を介して2個以上の吸着部位が結合し1価の置換基Aを形成する態様等が挙げられ、鎖状飽和炭化水素基を介して2個以上の吸着部位が結合し1価の置換基Aを形成する態様が好ましい。
 なお、吸着部位自体が1価の置換基を構成する場合には、吸着部位そのものがAで表される1価の置換基であってもよい。
As long as at least one adsorption site is included in one A 1 , two or more adsorption sites may be included.
As an embodiment in which two or more adsorption sites are included in one A 1 , for example, a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) A monovalent substitution wherein two or more adsorption sites are bonded via a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group (preferably having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), an aromatic group (preferably having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, for example, a phenylene group), etc. Examples include an embodiment in which the group A 1 is formed, and an embodiment in which two or more adsorption sites are bonded via a chain saturated hydrocarbon group to form a monovalent substituent A 1 is preferable.
In the case where adsorption sites themselves constitute a monovalent substituent, adsorption sites themselves may also be a monovalent substituent represented by A 1.
 まず、Aを構成する吸着部位について以下に説明する。
 「酸基」としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、モノ硫酸エステル基、リン酸基、モノリン酸エステル基、ホスホン酸基、ホスフィン酸基、又は、ホウ酸基が好ましく、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、モノ硫酸エステル基、リン酸基、モノリン酸エステル基、ホスホン酸基、又は、ホスフィン酸基がより好ましく、カルボン酸基が更に好ましい。
 「ウレア基」としては、例えば、-NR15CONR1617(ここで、R15、R16、及びR17はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)が好ましく、-NR15CONHR17(ここで、R15及びR17はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)がより好ましく、-NHCONHR17(ここで、R17は水素原子、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)が更に好ましい。
First, the adsorption site constituting A 1 will be described below.
As the “acid group”, for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a monosulfate group, a phosphoric acid group, a monophosphate group, a phosphonic acid group, a phosphinic acid group, or a boric acid group is preferable. A sulfonic acid group, a monosulfate group, a phosphoric acid group, a monophosphate group, a phosphonic acid group, or a phosphinic acid group is more preferable, and a carboxylic acid group is still more preferable.
Examples of the “urea group” include —NR 15 CONR 16 R 17 (wherein R 15 , R 16 , and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or 6 or more carbon atoms). Or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is preferred, and —NR 15 CONHR 17 (wherein R 15 and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, An aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is more preferable, and —NHCONHR 17 (where R 17 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 6 carbon atoms). The above aryl group or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is more preferred.
 「ウレタン基」としては、例えば、-NHCOOR18、-NR19COOR20、-OCONHR21、又は、-OCONR2223(ここで、R18、R19、R20、R21、R22及びR23はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)が好ましく、-NHCOOR18、又は、-OCONHR21(ここで、R18、R21はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)がより好ましく、-NHCOOR18、又は、-OCONHR21(ここで、R18、R21はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)が更に好ましい。 Examples of the “urethane group” include —NHCOOR 18 , —NR 19 COOR 20 , —OCONHR 21 , and —OCONR 22 R 23 (where R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 and R 23 are each independently an alkyl group having 6 or more aryl group having a carbon number of 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or represents the number 7 or aralkyl group having a carbon.) are preferred, -NHCOOR 18, or, -OCONHR 21 (wherein R 18 and R 21 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms, and is more preferably —NHCOOR 18 , or, -OCONHR 21 (wherein each R 18, R 21 are independently an alkyl group having 6 or more aryl carbons of 1 to 10 carbon atoms , Or represents the number 7 or aralkyl group having a carbon.) It is more preferred.
 「配位性酸素原子を有する基」としては、例えば、アセチルアセトナト基、及び、クラウンエーテルが挙げられる。
 「塩基性窒素原子を有する基」としては、例えば、アミノ基(-NH)、置換イミノ基(-NHR、-NR10、ここで、R、R、及びR10はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)、下記式(a1)で表されるグアニジル基、又は、下記式(a2)で表されるアミジニル基などが好ましい。
Examples of the “group having a coordinating oxygen atom” include an acetylacetonato group and a crown ether.
Examples of the “group having a basic nitrogen atom” include an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each Independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms), a guanidyl group represented by the following formula (a1), or the following formula: The amidinyl group represented by (a2) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式(a1)中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。
 式(a2)中、R13及びR14はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。
In formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
In the formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
 これらの中でも、アミノ基(-NH)、置換イミノ基(-NHR、-NR10、ここで、R、R、及びR10はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。)、式(a1)で表されるグアニジル基〔式(a1)中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕、又は、式(a2)で表されるアミジニル基〔式(a2)中、R13及びR14はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕がより好ましい。
 特に、アミノ基(-NH)、置換イミノ基(-NHR、-NR10、ここで、R、R、及びR10はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。)、式(a1)で表されるグアニジル基〔式(a1)中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕、又は、式(a2)で表されるアミジニル基〔式(a2)中、R13及びR14はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕などが更に好ましい。
Among these, an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Group, a phenyl group or a benzyl group), a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, Represents a phenyl group or a benzyl group. Or an amidinyl group represented by the formula (a2) [in the formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. ] Is more preferable.
In particular, an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, A phenyl group or a benzyl group), a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group; Or represents a benzyl group. Or an amidinyl group represented by the formula (a2) [in the formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. ] Is more preferable.
 「アルキル基」としては、直鎖状であっても、分岐状であってもよく、炭素数1~40のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数4~30のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数10~18のアルキル基であることが更に好ましい。
 「アリール基」としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基であることが好ましい。
 「アルキレンオキシ鎖を有する基」としては、末端がアルキルオキシ基又は水酸基を形成していることが好ましく、炭素数1~20のアルキルオキシ基がより好ましい。また、アルキレンオキシ鎖としては、少なくとも1つのアルキレンオキシ基を有する限り特に制限はないが、炭素数1~6のアルキレンオキシ基からなることが好ましい。アルキレンオキシ基としては、例えば、-CHCHO-、及び、-CHCHCHO-等が挙げられる。
 「アルキルオキシカルボニル基」におけるアルキル基部分としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましい。
 「アルキルアミノカルボニル基」におけるアルキル基部分としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましい。
 「カルボン酸塩基」としては、カルボン酸のアンモニウム塩からなる基が挙げられる。
 「スルホンアミド基」としては、窒素原子に結合する水素原子がアルキル基(メチル基等)、又は、アシル基(アセチル基、トリフルオロアセチル基など)等で置換されていてもよい。
The “alkyl group” may be linear or branched and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. An alkyl group having 10 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The “aryl group” is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
As the “group having an alkyleneoxy chain”, the terminal preferably forms an alkyloxy group or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably an alkyloxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The alkyleneoxy chain is not particularly limited as long as it has at least one alkyleneoxy group, but preferably comprises an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyleneoxy group include —CH 2 CH 2 O— and —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O—.
The alkyl group moiety in the “alkyloxycarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group moiety in the “alkylaminocarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the “carboxylic acid group” include a group consisting of an ammonium salt of a carboxylic acid.
In the “sulfonamide group”, a hydrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen atom may be substituted with an alkyl group (such as a methyl group) or an acyl group (such as an acetyl group or a trifluoroacetyl group).
 「複素環基」としては、例えば、チオフェン基、フラン基、キサンテン基、ピロール基、ピロリン基、ピロリジン基、ジオキソラン基、ピラゾール基、ピラゾリン基、ピラゾリジン基、イミダゾール基、オキサゾール基、チアゾール基、オキサジアゾール基、トリアゾール基、チアジアゾール基、ピラン基、ピリジン基、ピペリジン基、ジオキサン基、モルホリン基、ピリダジン基、ピリミジン基、ピペラジン基、トリアジン基、トリチアン基、イソインドリン基、イソインドリノン基、ベンズイミダゾロン基、ベンゾチアゾール基、ヒダントイン基、インドール基、キノリン基、カルバゾール基、アクリジン基、アクリドン基、及び、アントラキノン基が挙げられる。
 「イミド基」としては、コハクイミド基、フタルイミド基、及び、ナフタルイミド基等のイミド基が挙げられる。
Examples of the “heterocyclic group” include thiophene group, furan group, xanthene group, pyrrole group, pyrroline group, pyrrolidine group, dioxolane group, pyrazole group, pyrazoline group, pyrazolidine group, imidazole group, oxazole group, thiazole group, oxalate group. Diazole, triazole, thiadiazole, pyran, pyridine, piperidine, dioxane, morpholine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, piperazine, triazine, trithiane, isoindoline, isoindolinone, benz Examples include imidazolone group, benzothiazole group, hydantoin group, indole group, quinoline group, carbazole group, acridine group, acridone group, and anthraquinone group.
Examples of the “imide group” include imide groups such as a succinimide group, a phthalimide group, and a naphthalimide group.
 なお、「複素環基」及び「イミド基」は、更に置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~16のアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボン酸基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1~6のアシルオキシ基、炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、及び、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2~7のアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、並びに、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基が挙げられる。 The “heterocyclic group” and the “imide group” may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, Hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxylic acid group, sulfonamido group, N-sulfonylamido group, acetoxy group and other C1-C6 acyloxy group, C1-C20 alkoxy group, halogen atom, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl And a C2-C7 alkoxycarbonyl group such as a cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, and a carbonate group such as t-butyl carbonate.
 「アルコキシシリル基」としては、モノアルコキシシリル基、ジアルコキシシリル基、及び、トリアルコキシシリル基のいずれでもよいが、トリアルコキシシリル基が好ましく、例えば、トリメトキシシリル基、及び、トリエトキシシリル基などが挙げられる。
 「エポキシ基」としては、置換又は無置換のオキシラニル基(エチレンオキシド基)が挙げられる。
The “alkoxysilyl group” may be any of monoalkoxysilyl group, dialkoxysilyl group and trialkoxysilyl group, but trialkoxysilyl group is preferable, for example, trimethoxysilyl group and triethoxysilyl group Etc.
Examples of the “epoxy group” include a substituted or unsubstituted oxiranyl group (ethylene oxide group).
 特に、Aは、pKa5以上の官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましく、pKa5~14の官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることがより好ましい。
 ここでいう「pKa」とは、化学便覧(II)(改訂4版、1993年、日本化学会編、丸善株式会社)に記載されている定義のものである。
 上記pKa5以上の官能基としては、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、フェノール基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、アルキレンオキシ鎖を有する基、イミド基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、水酸基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。
 pKa5以上の官能基として具体的には、例えば、フェノール基(pKa 8~10程度)、アルキル基(pKa 46~53程度)、アリール基(pKa 40~43程度)、ウレア基(pKa 12~14程度)、ウレタン基(pKa 11~13程度)、配位性酸素原子としての-COCHCO-(pKa 8~10程度)、スルホンアミド基(pKa 9~11程度)、水酸基(pKa 15~17程度)、及び、複素環基(pKa 12~30程度)が挙げられる。
 上記の中では、Aとして、酸基、フェノール基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキレンオキシ鎖を有する基、水酸基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、スルホンアミド基、イミド基及び配位性酸素原子を有する基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましい。
In particular, A 1 is preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group of pKa5 or higher, and more preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group of pKa5 to 14.
Here, “pKa” has the definition described in Chemical Handbook (II) (4th revised edition, 1993, edited by The Chemical Society of Japan, Maruzen Co., Ltd.).
The functional group having a pKa of 5 or more includes a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a phenol group, a urea group, a urethane group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, and an alkylaminocarbonyl group. A group having an alkyleneoxy chain, an imide group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonamide group, a hydroxyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
Specific examples of functional groups having a pKa of 5 or more include, for example, a phenol group (about pKa 8 to 10), an alkyl group (about pKa 46 to 53), an aryl group (about pKa 40 to 43), a urea group (pKa 12 to 14). Degree), urethane group (about pKa 11 to 13), —COCH 2 CO— (about pKa 8 to 10) as a coordinating oxygen atom, sulfonamide group (about pKa 9 to 11), hydroxyl group (pKa 15 to 17) Degree) and heterocyclic groups (pKa of about 12 to 30).
In the above, A 1 has an acid group, a phenol group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a group having an alkyleneoxy chain, a hydroxyl group, a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group, and a coordinating oxygen atom. A monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups is preferred.
 一般式(X)中、Rは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。n個のRは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 Rで表される2価の連結基としては、1~100個の炭素原子、0~10個の窒素原子、0~50個の酸素原子、1~200個の水素原子、及び0~20個の硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
In general formula (X), R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. n R 2 may be the same or different.
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by R 2 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 20 A group consisting of a single sulfur atom is included, and it may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
 Rとしては、単結合、又は、1~10個の炭素原子、0~5個の窒素原子、0~10個の酸素原子、1~30個の水素原子、及び0~5個の硫黄原子から成り立つ2価の連結基が好ましい。
 Rとしては、鎖状飽和炭化水素基(直鎖状でも分岐状であってもよく、炭素数1~20であることが好ましい)、環状飽和炭化水素基(炭素数3~20であることが好ましい)、芳香族基(炭素数5~20であることが好ましく、例えば、フェニレン基)、チオエーテル結合、エステル結合、アミド結合、エーテル結合、窒素原子、及びカルボニル基よりなる群から選択される基、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基がより好ましく、鎖状飽和炭化水素基、環状飽和炭化水素基、芳香族基、チオエーテル結合、エステル結合、エーテル結合、及びアミド結合よりなる群から選択される基、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基が更に好ましく、鎖状飽和炭化水素基、チオエーテル結合、エステル結合、エーテル結合、及びアミド結合よりなる群から選択される基、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基が特に好ましい。
R 2 is a single bond or 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 0 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 oxygen atoms, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms. A divalent linking group consisting of
R 2 includes a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group (having 3 to 20 carbon atoms). Selected from the group consisting of an aromatic group (preferably having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenylene group), a thioether bond, an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a nitrogen atom, and a carbonyl group. More preferably a group or a combination of two or more of these, from the group consisting of a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group, an aromatic group, a thioether bond, an ester bond, an ether bond, and an amide bond. A group selected or a combination of two or more of these is more preferable, and a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a thioether bond, an ester bond, an ether bond, and an amide A group selected from the group consisting of a bond, or a group obtained by combining two or more of these is particularly preferable.
 上記のうち、Rで表される2価の連結基が置換基を有する場合、置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~16のアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボン酸基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1~6のアシルオキシ基、炭素数1~6のアルコキシ基、塩素原子及び臭素原子等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、及び、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2~7のアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、並びに、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。 Among the above, when the divalent linking group represented by R 2 has a substituent, examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, and an amino group. Groups, carboxylic acid groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, acetoxy groups and other acyloxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine atoms, methoxycarbonyl Groups, an ethoxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as a cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, and a carbonate group such as t-butyl carbonate.
 一般式(X)中、Rは、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。m+nは3~10を満たす。
 Rで表される(m+n)価の連結基としては、1~100個の炭素原子、0~10個の窒素原子、0~50個の酸素原子、1~200個の水素原子、及び、0~20個の硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
In general formula (X), R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and A group consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms is included, which may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
 Rで表される(m+n)価の連結基は下記一般式のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましい。 The (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 is preferably a group represented by any one of the following general formulas.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 上記一般式中、
 Lは3価の基を表す。Tは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、3個存在するTは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Lは4価の基を表す。Tは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、4個存在するTは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Lは5価の基を表す。Tは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、5個存在するTは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Lは6価の基を表す。Tは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、6個存在するTは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Rで表される(m+n)価の連結基の具体的な例〔具体例(1)~(17)〕を以下に示す。但し、これらに制限されるものではない。
In the above general formula,
L 3 represents a trivalent group. T 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and three T 3 s may be the same or different from each other.
L 4 represents a tetravalent group. T 4 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the four T 4 s may be the same or different from each other.
L 5 represents a pentavalent group. T 5 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and five T 5 s may be the same or different from each other.
L 6 represents a hexavalent group. T 6 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and six T 6 s may be the same or different from each other.
Specific examples (specific examples (1) to (17)) of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 are shown below. However, it is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 上記の具体例の中でも、原料の入手性、合成の容易さ、及び、各種溶媒への溶解性の点から、(m+n)価の連結基としては、下記(1)、(2)、(10)、(11)、(16)、又は、(17)の基が好ましい。 Among the above specific examples, from the viewpoint of availability of raw materials, ease of synthesis, and solubility in various solvents, the following (1), (2), (10 ), (11), (16) or (17) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 一般式(X)中、mは8以下の正の数を表す。mとしては、0.5~5が好ましく、1~4がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。
 また、一般式(X)中、nは1~9を表す。nとしては、2~8が好ましく、2~7がより好ましく、3~6が更に好ましい。
In general formula (X), m represents a positive number of 8 or less. m is preferably 0.5 to 5, more preferably 1 to 4, and still more preferably 1 to 3.
In the general formula (X), n represents 1 to 9. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, and still more preferably 3 to 6.
 一般式(X)中、Pはポリマー鎖を表し、公知のポリマーなどから目的等に応じて選択できる。m個のPは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 ポリマーの中でも、ビニルモノマーの重合体若しくは共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、エーテル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、アミド系ポリマー、エポキシ系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、及びこれらの変性物、又は、これらの共重合体〔例えば、ポリエーテル/ポリウレタン共重合体、ポリエーテル/ビニルモノマーの重合体の共重合体など(ランダム共重合体、ブロック共重合体、及び、グラフト共重合体のいずれであってもよい。)を含む。〕が好ましく、ビニルモノマーの重合体若しくは共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、エーテル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、及びこれらの変性物又は共重合体からなる群より選択される少なくとも一種がより好ましく、ビニルモノマーの重合体若しくは共重合体が更に好ましい。
 ポリマー鎖Pが有し得るビニルモノマーの重合体又は共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、及び、エーテル系ポリマーは、それぞれ、下記一般式(L)、(M)、又は、(N)で表される構造を有することが好ましい。
In the general formula (X), P 1 represents a polymer chain and can be selected from known polymers according to the purpose. The m P 1 may be the same or different.
Among the polymers, polymers or copolymers of vinyl monomers, ester polymers, ether polymers, urethane polymers, amide polymers, epoxy polymers, silicone polymers, and modified products thereof, or the copolymer of these Copolymer [For example, a polyether / polyurethane copolymer, a copolymer of a polyether / vinyl monomer polymer, etc. (any of a random copolymer, a block copolymer, and a graft copolymer may be used. )including. More preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of polymers or copolymers of vinyl monomers, ester polymers, ether polymers, urethane polymers, and modified products or copolymers thereof, and vinyl monomers. More preferred are polymers or copolymers.
The polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomers, the ester polymer, and the ether polymer that the polymer chain P 1 may have are each represented by the following general formula (L), (M), or (N). It is preferable to have a structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 上記一般式中、
 Xは、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。Xは、合成上の制約の点から、水素原子、又は、炭素数1~12のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子又はメチル基がより好ましく、メチル基が更に好ましい。
 R10は、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。R10は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又は、ヘテロアリール基が好ましく、水素原子、又は、アルキル基がより好ましく。R10がアルキル基である場合、アルキル基としては、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~20の分岐状アルキル基、又は炭素数5~20の環状アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖状アルキル基が更に好ましい。ポリマー鎖は、一般式(L)中のR10が異なる2種以上の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 R11及びR12は、直鎖又は分岐のアルキレン基(炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、2~8がより好ましく、3~6が更に好ましい。)を表す。ポリマー鎖は、各一般式中のR11又はR12が異なる2種以上の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 k1、k2、及び、k3は、それぞれ独立に、5~140の数を表す。
In the above general formula,
X 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. X 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and still more preferably a methyl group, from the viewpoint of synthesis constraints.
R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R 10 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. When R 10 is an alkyl group, the alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, A linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is still more preferable. The polymer chain may have two or more types of repeating units in which R 10 in the general formula (L) is different.
R 11 and R 12 represent a linear or branched alkylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 2 to 8, and still more preferably 3 to 6). The polymer chain may have two or more kinds of repeating units in which R 11 or R 12 in each general formula is different.
k1, k2, and k3 each independently represents a number of 5 to 140.
 ポリマー鎖Pは、少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含有することが好ましい。
 ポリマー鎖Pにおける、少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位の繰り返し単位数kが、立体反発力を発揮し分散安定性を向上する観点から、5以上であることが好ましく、7以上であることがより好ましい。
 また、高分子化合物Xの嵩張りを抑え、膜中に顔料を密に存在させることを達成する点から、少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位の繰り返し単位数kは、140以下であることが好ましく、130以下であることがより好ましく、60以下であることが更に好ましい。
The polymer chain P 1 preferably contains at least one repeating unit.
The number k of the repeating units of at least one repeating unit in the polymer chain P 1 is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 7 or more, from the viewpoint of exhibiting steric repulsion and improving dispersion stability. .
Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing the bulk of the polymer compound X and allowing the pigment to be densely present in the film, the number k of repeating units of at least one repeating unit is preferably 140 or less, and 130 Or less, more preferably 60 or less.
 なお、ポリマーは有機溶媒に可溶であることが好ましい。有機溶媒との親和性が高いと、分散媒との親和性が強くなる。
 上記ビニルモノマーとしては、特に制限されないが、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類、クロトン酸エステル類、ビニルエステル類、酸基を有するビニルモノマー、マレイン酸ジエステル類、フマル酸ジエステル類、イタコン酸ジエステル類、(メタ)アクリルアミド類、スチレン類、ビニルエーテル類、ビニルケトン類、オレフィン類、マレイミド類、又は、(メタ)アクリロニトリルが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類、クロトン酸エステル類、ビニルエステル類、又は、酸基を有するビニルモノマーがより好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類、又は、クロトン酸エステル類が更に好ましい。
 ビニルモノマーの好ましい例としては、特開2007-277514号公報の段落0089~0094、0096及び0097(対応する米国特許出願公開第2010/233595号明細書においては段落0105~0117、及び0119~0120)に記載のビニルモノマーが挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
The polymer is preferably soluble in an organic solvent. When the affinity with the organic solvent is high, the affinity with the dispersion medium becomes strong.
Although it does not restrict | limit especially as said vinyl monomer, For example, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, vinyl monomers having an acid group, maleic acid diesters, fumaric acid diesters, itaconic acid diesters , (Meth) acrylamides, styrenes, vinyl ethers, vinyl ketones, olefins, maleimides, or (meth) acrylonitrile, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, or The vinyl monomer having an acid group is more preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid esters or crotonic acid esters are still more preferable.
Preferable examples of the vinyl monomer include paragraphs 0089 to 0094, 0096 and 0097 of JP-A-2007-277514 (paragraphs 0105 to 0117 and 0119 to 0120 in the corresponding US 2010/233595). And their contents are incorporated herein by reference.
 上記の化合物以外にも、例えば、ウレタン基、ウレア基、スルホンアミド基、フェノール基、及び、イミド基などの官能基を有するビニルモノマーも用いることができる。このようなウレタン基、又はウレア基を有する単量体としては、例えば、イソシアナート基と水酸基又はアミノ基との付加反応を利用して、適宜合成できる。具体的には、イソシアナート基含有モノマーと水酸基を1個含有する化合物又は1級若しくは2級アミノ基を1個含有する化合物との付加反応により合成できる。 In addition to the above compounds, for example, vinyl monomers having a functional group such as a urethane group, a urea group, a sulfonamide group, a phenol group, and an imide group can also be used. As such a monomer having a urethane group or a urea group, for example, it can be appropriately synthesized by utilizing an addition reaction between an isocyanate group and a hydroxyl group or an amino group. Specifically, it can be synthesized by an addition reaction between an isocyanate group-containing monomer and a compound containing one hydroxyl group or a compound containing one primary or secondary amino group.
 一般式(X)で表される高分子化合物の中でも、下記一般式(Y)で表される高分子化合物が好ましい。 Among the polymer compounds represented by the general formula (X), the polymer compound represented by the following general formula (Y) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 一般式(Y)において、Aは、一般式(X)におけるAと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 一般式(Y)において、R、Rはそれぞれ独立に単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。n個のRは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。また、m個のRは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 R、Rで表される2価の連結基としては、一般式(X)のRで表される2価の連結基として挙げられたものと同様のものが用いられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 なかでも、R、Rで表される2価の連結基としては、鎖状飽和炭化水素基(直鎖状でも分岐状であってもよく、炭素数1~20であることが好ましい)、環状飽和炭化水素基(炭素数3~20であることが好ましい)、芳香族基(炭素数5~20であることが好ましく、例えば、フェニレン基)、エステル結合、アミド結合、エーテル結合、窒素原子、カルボニル基、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基が好ましく、鎖状飽和炭化水素基、環状飽和炭化水素基、芳香族基、エステル結合、エーテル結合、アミド結合、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基がより好ましく、鎖状飽和炭化水素基、エステル結合、エーテル結合、アミド結合、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基が更に好ましい。
In the general formula (Y), A 2 has the same meaning as A 1 in the general formula (X), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same.
In the general formula (Y), R 4 and R 5 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The n R 4 s may be the same or different. The m R 5 s may be the same or different.
As the divalent linking group represented by R 4 or R 5 , the same divalent linking groups as those represented by R 2 in the general formula (X) can be used, and preferred embodiments are also described. It is the same.
Among them, as the divalent linking group represented by R 4 or R 5 , a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched and preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms) A cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group (preferably having 3 to 20 carbon atoms), an aromatic group (preferably having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenylene group), an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a nitrogen An atom, a carbonyl group, or a group in which two or more of these are combined is preferable, and a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group, an aromatic group, an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, or these two A group in which two or more are combined is more preferable, and a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, an ester bond, an ether bond, an amide bond, or a group in which two or more of these are combined is more preferable.
 一般式(Y)において、Rは、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。m+nは3~10を満たす。
 Rで表される(m+n)価の連結基としては、置換基を更に有していてもよく、一般式(X)のRで表される(m+n)価の連結基として挙げられたものと同様のものが用いられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 一般式(Y)中、m、nは、それぞれ、一般式(X)におけるm、nと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 また、一般式(Y)中のPは、一般式(X)におけるPと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。m個のPは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (Y), R 3 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
The (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 3 may further have a substituent, and is exemplified as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 in the general formula (X). The same thing as a thing is used, and a preferable aspect is also the same.
In general formula (Y), m and n are synonymous with m and n in general formula (X), respectively, and a preferable aspect is also the same.
Further, P 2 in formula (Y) has the same meaning as P 1 in the general formula (X), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same. the m P 2 can be the same or different.
 一般式(Y)で表される高分子化合物のうち、以下に示すR、R、R、P、m、及びnを全て満たすものが最も好ましい。
 R:上記具体例(1)、(2)、(10)、(11)、(16)、又は(17)
 R:単結合、鎖状飽和炭化水素基、環状飽和炭化水素基、芳香族基、エステル結合、アミド結合、エーテル結合、窒素原子、カルボニル基、又は、これらの2つ以上を組み合わせた基
 R:単結合、エチレン基、プロピレン基、下記基(a)、又は下記基(b)
 なお、下記基中、R12は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、lは1又は2を表す。
Among the polymer compounds represented by the general formula (Y), those satisfying all of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , P 2 , m, and n shown below are most preferable.
R 3 : Specific example (1), (2), (10), (11), (16), or (17) above
R 4 : a single bond, a chain saturated hydrocarbon group, a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group, an aromatic group, an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a nitrogen atom, a carbonyl group, or a group in which two or more of these are combined R 5 : Single bond, ethylene group, propylene group, the following group (a), or the following group (b)
In the following groups, R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and l represents 1 or 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 P:ビニルモノマーの重合体若しくは共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、エーテル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、又は、これらの変性物
 m:1~3
 n:3~6
P 2 : Polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomer, ester polymer, ether polymer, urethane polymer, or modified products thereof m: 1 to 3
n: 3-6
 一般式(X)又は(Y)で表される高分子化合物の中でも、顔料の分散安定性の点から、下記一般式(Z)で表される高分子化合物が好ましい。 Among the polymer compounds represented by the general formula (X) or (Y), the polymer compound represented by the following general formula (Z) is preferable from the viewpoint of the dispersion stability of the pigment.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 上記一般式(Z)中、
 Rは、(m+n1+n2)価の連結基を表し、R~Rはそれぞれ独立に単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Aは酸基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基を表す。Aは、Aとは異なる1価の置換基を表す。n1個のA及びRは、それぞれ、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。n2個のA及びRは、それぞれ、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 mは一般式(X)におけるmと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 n1は1~8を表し、n2は1~8を表し、m+n1+n2は3~10を満たす。
 Pは一般式(Y)におけるPと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。m個のP及びRは、それぞれ、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 Rについての(m+n1+n2)価の連結基としては、一般式(X)のR又は一般式(Y)のRで表される(m+n)価の連結基として挙げられたものと同様のものが用いられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 R~Rについての2価の連結基としては、一般式(Y)のR及びRで表される2価の連結基として挙げられたものと同様のものが用いられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 上記置換基Aが有し得る酸基の具体例及び好ましい例としては、一般式(X)における酸基について前述した具体例及び好ましい例と同様のものが挙げられる。
 上記置換基AがpKaが5より小さい酸基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましく、スルホン酸基、カルボン酸基、リン酸基、ホスホン酸基及びホスフィン酸基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることがより好ましく、カルボン酸基が更に好ましい。
 Aとは異なる1価の置換基Aの具体例及び好ましい例としては、一般式(X)におけるAについて前述した具体例及び好ましい例のうちの酸基以外の基と同様のものが挙げられる。なかでも、上記置換基AはpKa5以上の官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることがより好ましく、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、フェノール基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、アルキレンオキシ鎖を有する基、イミド基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、水酸基及び複素環基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましく、アルキル基、アリール基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、ウレア基又はウレタン基であることがより好ましい。
In the general formula (Z),
R 6 represents a (m + n1 + n2) -valent linking group, and R 7 to R 9 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
A 3 represents a monovalent substituent having at least one acid group. A 4 represents a monovalent substituent different from A 3 . The n1 A 3 and R 7 may be the same or different from each other. The n2 A 4 and R 8 may be the same or different from each other.
m is synonymous with m in the general formula (X), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
n1 represents 1 to 8, n2 represents 1 to 8, and m + n1 + n2 satisfies 3 to 10.
P 3 has the same meaning as P 2 in formula (Y), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same. The m P 3 and R 9 may be the same or different.
The (m + n1 + n2) -valent linking group for R 6 is the same as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 in the general formula (X) or R 3 in the general formula (Y). The preferred embodiment is the same.
As the divalent linking group for R 7 to R 9 , the same divalent linking groups as those represented by R 4 and R 5 in formula (Y) can be used, and preferred embodiments Is the same.
Specific examples and preferred examples of the acid group that the substituent A 3 may have include those similar to the specific examples and preferred examples described above for the acid group in formula (X).
The substituent A 3 is preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one acid group having a pKa smaller than 5 and is composed of a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphinic acid group. A monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group is more preferable, and a carboxylic acid group is still more preferable.
Specific examples and preferred examples of the monovalent substituent A 4 different from A 3 include those similar to the groups other than the acid group in the specific examples and preferred examples described above for A 1 in the general formula (X). Can be mentioned. Among these, the substituent A 4 is more preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group having a pKa of 5 or more, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, and a phenol group. , Urea group, urethane group, alkyl group, aryl group, alkyloxycarbonyl group, alkylaminocarbonyl group, group having an alkyleneoxy chain, imide group, carboxylate group, sulfonamide group, hydroxyl group and heterocyclic group It is preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one selected group, and is an alkyl group, an aryl group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a urea group or a urethane group It is more preferable.
 置換基Aと置換基Aとの組合せとしては、置換基AがpKaが5より小さい官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であり、かつ置換基AがpKa5以上の官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましい。
 置換基Aが、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、ホスホン酸基及びホスフィン酸基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であり、かつ、置換基Aが配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、フェノール基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、アルキレンオキシ鎖を有する基、イミド基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、水酸基及び複素環基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることがより好ましい。
 置換基Aが、カルボン酸基を有する1価の置換基であり、かつ、置換基Aが、アルキル基、アリール基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、ウレア基又はウレタン基であることが更に好ましい。
 顔料と、置換基Aのアルキル基との吸着が良好である点から、置換基Aがカルボン酸基であり、かつ、置換基Aがアルキル基であることが特に好ましい。
As a combination of the substituent A 3 and the substituent A 4 , the substituent A 3 is a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group having a pKa of less than 5, and the substituent A 4 has a functionality of pKa 5 or more. A monovalent substituent having at least one group is preferable.
Substituent A 3 is a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphinic acid group, and A 4 has a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a phenol group, a urea group, a urethane group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, or an alkyleneoxy chain. It is more preferably a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a group, an imide group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonamide group, a hydroxyl group and a heterocyclic group.
The substituent A 3 is a monovalent substituent having a carboxylic acid group, and the substituent A 4 is an alkyl group, an aryl group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, More preferably, it is a urea group or a urethane group.
And pigments, from the viewpoint that the adsorption of alkyl group substituents A 3 is good, the substituent A 3 is a carboxylic acid group, and the substituent A 4 is particularly preferably an alkyl group.
 分散剤の具体例としては、例えば、BYK Chemie社製「Disperbyk-161、162、163、164、165、166、170、190(商品名、高分子共重合物)」、及び、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050、4010、4165(商品名、ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330、4340(商品名、ブロック共重合体)」等が挙げられる。
 また、分散剤の具体例としては、特開2013-249417号公報の段落0127~0129に記載の高分子化合物を参照でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、分散剤としては、特開2010-106268号公報の段落0037~0115(対応するUS2011/0124824の段落0075~0133欄)のグラフト共重合体が使用でき、これらの内容は援用でき、本明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、上記以外にも、特開2011-153283号公報の段落0028~0084(対応するUS2011/0279759の段落0075~0133欄)の酸性基が連結基を介して結合してなる側鎖構造を有する構成成分を含む高分子化合物が使用でき、これらの内容は援用でき、本明細書に組み込まれる。
 分散剤は、単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
Specific examples of the dispersant include, for example, “Disperbyk-161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170, 190 (trade name, polymer copolymer)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, and “manufactured by EFKA” EFKA 4047, 4050, 4010, 4165 (trade name, polyurethane type), EFKA 4330, 4340 (trade name, block copolymer) ”and the like.
As specific examples of the dispersant, reference can be made to the polymer compounds described in paragraphs 0127 to 0129 of JP2013-249417A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Further, as the dispersant, the graft copolymer described in JP-A 2010-106268, paragraphs 0037 to 0115 (corresponding to columns 0075 to 0133 in US2011 / 0124824) can be used, and the contents thereof can be used. Embedded in the book.
In addition to the above, it has a side chain structure in which acidic groups in paragraphs 0028 to 0084 (corresponding to columns 0075 to 0133 of US 2011/0279759) of JP 2011-153283 A are bonded via a linking group. Polymeric compounds containing components can be used, the contents of which can be incorporated and incorporated herein.
A dispersing agent may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
 前駆体組成物中における分散剤の含有量は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、組成物の全固形分に対して、1~30質量%が好ましく、1~20質量%がより好ましく、1~15質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the dispersant in the precursor composition is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, and preferably 1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Is more preferable, and 1 to 15% by mass is still more preferable.
 また、前駆体組成物中における分散剤(D)の質量と顔料(P)の質量との比(D/P比)は、分散液の経時粘度及び固形分安定性がより優れると同時に塗布膜の膜厚面内均一性を良好とする点で、0.1~0.45が好ましく、0.12~0.4がより好ましく、0.14~0.35が更に好ましい。 Further, the ratio (D / P ratio) between the mass of the dispersant (D) and the mass of the pigment (P) in the precursor composition is excellent in the viscosity with time and solid content stability of the dispersion, and at the same time, the coating film In view of improving the in-plane uniformity of the film thickness, it is preferably 0.1 to 0.45, more preferably 0.12 to 0.4, and still more preferably 0.14 to 0.35.
<有機溶媒>
 前駆体組成物は、有機溶媒を含有する。
 有機溶媒の例としては、例えば、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサン、酢酸エチル、エチレンジクロライド、テトラヒドロフラン、トルエン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、アセチルアセトン、シクロヘキサノン、ジアセトンアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノイソプロピルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシプロパノール、メトキシメトキシエタノール、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシプロピルアセテート、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、γ-ブチロラクトン、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、及び、乳酸エチルなどが挙げられるが、これらに制限されない。
<Organic solvent>
The precursor composition contains an organic solvent.
Examples of organic solvents include, for example, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexane, ethyl acetate, ethylene dichloride, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether. , Acetylacetone, cyclohexanone, diacetone alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoisopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropanol, methoxymethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, γ-butyrolactone, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate , Methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate, but are not limited thereto.
 有機溶媒は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 有機溶媒を2種以上組み合わせて用いる場合、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、及び、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液が好ましい。
An organic solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
When two or more organic solvents are used in combination, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone A mixed solution composed of two or more selected from ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable.
 前駆体組成物中における有機溶媒の含有量は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、組成物全質量に対して、10~95質量%が好ましく、50~95質量%がより好ましく、55~90質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the organic solvent in the precursor composition is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 50 to 95% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Preferably, 55 to 90% by mass is more preferable.
(その他の添加剤)
 前駆体組成物は、必要に応じてその他の添加剤を、本発明の効果を害しない範囲内において含有しうる。その他の添加剤としては、例えば、乾燥防止剤(湿潤剤)、褪色防止剤、乳化安定剤、浸透促進剤、紫外線吸収剤、防腐剤、防黴剤、pH調整剤、表面張力調整剤、消泡剤、粘度調整剤、防錆剤、キレート剤、酸化防止剤、密着助剤、界面活性剤、樹脂コート剤、及び、顔料誘導体等の公知の添加剤が挙げられる。
(Other additives)
The precursor composition may contain other additives as necessary within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. Other additives include, for example, anti-drying agents (wetting agents), anti-fading agents, emulsion stabilizers, penetration enhancers, ultraviolet absorbers, preservatives, anti-fungal agents, pH adjusters, surface tension adjusters, Known additives such as foaming agents, viscosity modifiers, rust inhibitors, chelating agents, antioxidants, adhesion aids, surfactants, resin coating agents, and pigment derivatives can be used.
<顔料分散物>
 上記手順によって製造された顔料分散物には、顔料、分散剤、及び、有機溶媒が含まれる。顔料分散物中での顔料の平均粒子径の好適範囲は、上述の通りである。
 得られた顔料分散物には、重合開始剤、重合性化合物、アルカリ可溶性樹脂などの各主成分が添加されて、硬化性組成物が形成されてもよい。
 硬化性組成物としては、各種用途に適用することができ、例えば、顔料として黒色顔料を用いた場合は、遮光膜形成用途に適用できる。
 また、上記硬化性組成物より形成される硬化膜は、種々の用途に適用でき、例えば、カラーフィルタなどが挙げられる。
 また、上記硬化膜は、各種装置に適用することができ、例えば、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置などが挙げられる。
<Pigment dispersion>
The pigment dispersion produced by the above procedure includes a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent. The preferable range of the average particle diameter of the pigment in the pigment dispersion is as described above.
Each of the main components such as a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin may be added to the obtained pigment dispersion to form a curable composition.
As a curable composition, it can apply to various uses, for example, when a black pigment is used as a pigment, it can apply to a light shielding film formation use.
Moreover, the cured film formed from the said curable composition can be applied to various uses, for example, a color filter etc. are mentioned.
Moreover, the said cured film can be applied to various apparatuses, for example, a solid-state image sensor, an image display apparatus, etc. are mentioned.
 本発明の顔料分散物を用いて、硬化性組成物(以下、「組成物」とも表記する。)を形成する場合の詳細を以下に説明する。 Details of forming a curable composition (hereinafter also referred to as “composition”) using the pigment dispersion of the present invention will be described below.
〔重合開始剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、重合開始剤を含有していてもよい。
 重合開始剤としては特に制限はなく、公知の重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、感光性を有するもの(いわゆる、光重合開始剤)が好ましい。
 光重合開始剤としては、重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択できる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視光線領域に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよい。また、モノマーの種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。
 また、光重合開始剤は、約300nm~800nm(330nm~500nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。
(Polymerization initiator)
The composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization initiator.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a polymerization initiator, It can select suitably from well-known polymerization initiators, For example, what has photosensitivity (what is called a photoinitiator) is preferable.
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity from the ultraviolet region to the visible light region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some active radicals by generating some action with the photoexcited sensitizer. Moreover, the initiator which starts cationic polymerization according to the kind of monomer may be sufficient.
The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられる。上記トリアジン骨格を有するハロゲン化炭化水素化合物としては、例えば、若林ら著、Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan,42、2924(1969)記載の化合物、英国特許1388492号明細書記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報記載の化合物、独国特許3337024号明細書記載の化合物、F.C.SchaeferなどによるJ.Org.Chem.;29、1527(1964)記載の化合物、特開昭62-58241号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-281728号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-34920号公報記載化合物、及び、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されている化合物、などが挙げられる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, and oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds such as, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones. Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3337024, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), a compound described in JP-A-62-258241, a compound described in JP-A-5-281728, a compound described in JP-A-5-34920, and US Pat. No. 4,221,976. Compounds described in the specification, and the like.
 また、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物及びその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体及びその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、並びに、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums A compound selected from the group consisting of a compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound and a derivative thereof, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex and a salt thereof, a halomethyloxadiazole compound, and a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound preferable.
 なかでも、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、又は、アセトフェノン化合物がより好ましく、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、又は、ベンゾフェノン化合物が更に好ましい。 Among these, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, or acetophenone compounds are more preferable, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α -More preferred are aminoketone compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers or benzophenone compounds.
 特に、硬化性組成物を固体撮像素子の遮光膜の作製に使用する場合には、微細なパターンをシャープな形状で形成する必要があるために、硬化性とともに未露光部に残渣がなく現像されることが重要である。このような観点からは、光重合開始剤としてはオキシム化合物が好ましい。特に、固体撮像素子において微細なパターンを形成する場合、硬化用露光にステッパー露光を用いるが、この露光機はハロゲンにより損傷される場合があり、光重合開始剤の添加量も低く抑える必要があるため、これらの点を考慮すれば、固体撮像素子の如き微細パターンを形成するには光重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物を用いるのが好ましい。また、オキシム化合物を用いることにより、色移り性をより良化できる。
 光重合開始剤の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0265~0268を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In particular, when a curable composition is used for the production of a light-shielding film for a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It's important to. From such a viewpoint, an oxime compound is preferable as the photopolymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed in a solid-state imaging device, stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, considering these points, it is preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device. Further, the use of an oxime compound can improve the color transfer.
As specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator, for example, paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 光重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物も好ましい。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、及び、特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィン系開始剤も挙げられる。
 ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、IRGACURE-184、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959、及び、IRGACURE-127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)が挙げられる。
 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、及び、IRGACURE-379EG(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)が挙げられる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、365nm又は405nm等の長波光源に吸収波長がマッチングされた特開2009-191179公報に記載の化合物も挙げられる。
 アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-819、及び、DAROCUR-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)が挙げられる。
As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds are also preferable. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 are also included.
Examples of the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator include IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF).
Examples of aminoacetophenone-based initiators include commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379EG (trade names: all manufactured by BASF). Examples of the aminoacetophenone-based initiator include compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 in which an absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source such as 365 nm or 405 nm.
Examples of the acylphosphine initiator include IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF), which are commercially available products.
 光重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物(オキシム系開始剤)が好ましい。オキシム化合物は、高感度で重合効率が高く、色材濃度によらず硬化でき、色材の濃度を高く設計しやすいため好ましい。
 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報記載の化合物、及び、特開2006-342166号公報記載の化合物が挙げられる。
 オキシム化合物の好適態様としては、例えば、3-ベンゾイロキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイロキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び、2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。
 また、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660)、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232、特開2000-66385号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、及び、特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等も挙げられる。
 市販品ではIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、及び、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)も好適に用いられる。また、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831及びアデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)も用いることができる。
As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound (oxime initiator) is preferable. Oxime compounds are preferred because they are highly sensitive, have high polymerization efficiency, can be cured regardless of the color material concentration, and can be easily designed with a high color material concentration.
Specific examples of the oxime compound include a compound described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, a compound described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and a compound described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
Preferred embodiments of the oxime compound include, for example, 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3 -One, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, and And 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
In addition, J.H. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp. Examples include compounds described in 202-232, JP-A 2000-66385, JP-A 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, and JP-A 2006-342166. It is done.
As commercially available products, IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) are also preferably used. Further, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arkles NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (made by ADEKA) can also be used.
 また上記記載以外のオキシム化合物としては、カルバゾールN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許第7626957号公報に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報及び米国特許公開2009-292039号記載の化合物、国際公開特許2009-131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許7556910号公報に記載の化合物、並びに、405nmに吸収極大を有しg線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報記載の化合物などが挙げられる。
 また、オキシム化合物としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0274~0275を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 具体的には、オキシム化合物としては、下記式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。なお、オキシムのN-O結合が(E)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(Z)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(E)体と(Z)体との混合物であってもよい。
Further, as oxime compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N position, and compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety A compound described in JP 2010-15025 A and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Publication No. 2009-131189, the triazine skeleton and the oxime skeleton are the same Examples thereof include compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained in the molecule, and compounds described in JP-A-2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source.
As the oxime compound, for example, paragraphs 0274 to 0275 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
Specifically, the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1). The oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 一般式(OX-1)中、R及びBはそれぞれ独立に一価の置換基を表し、Aは二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表す。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Rで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
 一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、及び、アリールチオカルボニル基が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、更に他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、及び、アリール基が挙げられる。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Bで表される一価の置換基としては、アリール基、複素環基、アリールカルボニル基、又は、複素環カルボニル基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Aで表される二価の有機基としては、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、又は、アルキニレン基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
In general formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
In General Formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
In the general formula (OX-1), the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
 光重合開始剤としては、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報記載の化合物24、36~40、及び、特開2013-164471号公報記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A 2013-164471. Examples thereof include compound (C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
 光重合開始剤として、下記一般式(1)又は(2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(1)において、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数4~20の脂環式炭化水素基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、又は、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基を表し、R及びRがフェニル基の場合、フェニル基どうしが結合してフルオレン基を形成してもよく、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基又は炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合又はカルボニル基を示す。 In Formula (1), R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or When an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms is represented and R 1 and R 2 are phenyl groups, the phenyl groups may be bonded to each other to form a fluorene group, and R 3 and R 4 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and X represents a direct bond or carbonyl Indicates a group.
 式(2)において、R、R、R及びRは、式(1)におけるR、R、R及びRと同義であり、Rは、-R、-OR、-SR、-COR、-CONR、-NRCOR、-OCOR、-COOR、-SCOR、-OCSR、-COSR、-CSOR、-CN、ハロゲン原子又は水酸基を表し、Rは、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基又は炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合又はカルボニル基を表し、aは0~4の整数を表す。 In the formula (2), R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 in Formula (1), R 5 is -R 6, -OR 6 , —SR 6 , —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN, halogen R 6 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms; X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 上記式(1)及び式(2)において、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル、シクロヘキシル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Rはメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はキシリル基が好ましい。Rは炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Rはメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はナフチル基が好ましい。Xは直接結合が好ましい。
 式(1)及び式(2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、例えば、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0076~0079に記載された化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。
In the above formulas (1) and (2), R 1 and R 2 are preferably each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group. R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group. R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group. X is preferably a direct bond.
Specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (1) and formula (2) include, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0079 of JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、これらに制限されるものではない。 Specific examples of oxime compounds that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 オキシム化合物は、350~500nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものが好ましく、360~480nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものがより好ましく、365nm及び405nmの吸光度が高いものが更に好ましい。
 オキシム化合物は、365nm又は405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、1,000~300,000であることが好ましく、2,000~300,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが更に好ましい。
 化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法で測定できるが、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spctrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。
 重合開始剤は、必要に応じて2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
The oxime compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 to 480 nm, and more preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably from 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is more preferable.
The molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured by a known method. For example, the molar extinction coefficient is measured at a concentration of 0.01 g / L using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrphotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent. It is preferable.
You may use a polymerization initiator in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
 重合開始剤の含有量は、硬化性組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~50質量%が好ましく、0.5~30質量%がより好ましく、1~20質量%がより好ましい。この範囲で、より良好な感度とパターン形成性が得られる。本発明の硬化性組成物は、重合開始剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the curable composition. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained. The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization initiator or two or more types of polymerization initiators. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
(b)重合性化合物
 重合性化合物は、少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン性不飽和基を有し、沸点が常圧で100℃以上である化合物が好ましい。特に、重合性化合物中にはエチレン性不飽和基が2~10個含まれることが好ましく、いわゆる多官能重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
 少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン性不飽和基を有し、沸点が常圧で100℃以上である化合物としては、例えば、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の単官能のアクリレート又はメタアクリレート;ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、グリセリン又はトリメチロールエタン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの、ペンタエリスリトール又はジペンタエリスリトールのポリ(メタ)アクリレート化したもの、特公昭48-41708号、特公昭50-6034号、特開昭51-37193号の各公報に記載のウレタンアクリレート類、特開昭48-64183号、特公昭49-43191号、特公昭52-30490号の各公報に記載のポリエステルアクリレート類、エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸との反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレートが挙げられる。更に、日本接着協会誌Vol.20、No.7、300~308頁に光硬化性モノマー及びオリゴマーとして紹介されているものも使用できる。
 また、特開平10-62986号公報において一般式(1)及び一般式(2)としてその具体例と共に記載の多官能アルコールに、エチレンオキサイド又はプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後に(メタ)アクリレート化した化合物も用いることができる。
 なかでも、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、及びこれらのアクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介してジペンタエリスリトールに連結している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。
 また、特公昭48-41708号、特開昭51-37193号、特公平2-32293号、及び特公平2-16765号の各公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類、又は、特公昭58-49860号、特公昭56-17654号、特公昭62-39417号、及び特公昭62-39418号の各公報記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。更に、特開昭63-277653号、特開昭63-260909号、及び特開平1-105238号の各公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造又はスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性化合物類も好適である。
 市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(商品名、日本製紙ケミカル(株)製)、UA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(商品名、日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、及び、AI-600(商品名、共栄社化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。
 また、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物類も好適であり、市販品としては、例えば、東亜合成株式会社製のカルボン酸基含有3官能アクリレートであるTO-756、及びカルボン酸基含有5官能アクリレートであるTO-1382などが挙げられる。本発明に用いられる重合性化合物としては、4官能以上のアクリレート化合物がより好ましい。4官能以上のアクリレート化合物として、例えばKAYARD DPHA(商品名、日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。
(B) Polymerizable compound The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group and having a boiling point of 100 ° C or higher at normal pressure. In particular, the polymerizable compound preferably contains 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated groups, and is preferably a so-called polyfunctional polymerizable compound.
Examples of the compound having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group and having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher at normal pressure include, for example, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, phenoxy Monofunctional acrylate or methacrylate such as ethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, penta Erythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) A polyfunctional alcohol such as ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerin or trimethylol ethane, after addition of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide and (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol poly ( (Meth) acrylate, urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-B-50-6034, JP-A-51-37193, JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49- Polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyester acrylates and epoxy acrylates, which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, are described in JP-A-43191 and JP-B-52-30490. Furthermore, the Japan Adhesion Association Vol. 20, No. 7, pages 300 to 308, which are introduced as photocurable monomers and oligomers, can also be used.
Further, compounds obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to a polyfunctional alcohol described in JP-A-10-62986 as general formula (1) and general formula (2) together with specific examples thereof and then (meth) acrylated Can also be used.
Of these, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and structures in which these acryloyl groups are linked to dipentaerythritol via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred. These oligomer types can also be used.
Also, urethane acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765, or JP-B-58 Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B Nos. -49860, 56-17654, 62-39417, and 62-39418 are also suitable. Furthermore, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are also suitable. It is.
Commercially available products include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (trade name, manufactured by Nippon Paper Chemicals Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (trade name, Nippon Kasei) Yakuhin Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, and AI-600 (trade name, manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.).
In addition, ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group are also suitable. Examples of commercially available products include TO-756, which is a carboxylic acid group-containing trifunctional acrylate manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd., and a carboxylic acid group-containing pentafunctional group. Examples thereof include TO-1382 which is an acrylate. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is more preferably a tetrafunctional or higher acrylate compound. Examples of the tetrafunctional or higher acrylate compound include KAYARD DPHA (trade name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 2種以上の重合性化合物を組み合わせて用いる場合、その組み合わせ態様は、組成物に要求される物性等に応じて適宜設定できる。重合性化合物の好適な組み合わせ態様の一つとしては、例えば、上述した多官能のアクリレート化合物から選択した2種以上の重合性化合物を組み合わせる態様が挙げられ、その一例としては、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート及びペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレートの組み合わせが挙げられる。
 重合性化合物の含有量は、硬化性組成物中の全固形分に対して、3~55質量%が好ましく、10~50質量%がより好ましい。
A polymeric compound may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
When two or more polymerizable compounds are used in combination, the combination mode can be appropriately set according to the physical properties required for the composition. As one suitable combination mode of the polymerizable compound, for example, a mode in which two or more polymerizable compounds selected from the polyfunctional acrylate compounds described above are combined, and an example thereof is dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate. And a combination of pentaerythritol triacrylate.
The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 3 to 55% by mass, more preferably 10 to 50% by mass, based on the total solid content in the curable composition.
〔シランカップリング剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有していてもよい。
 シランカップリング剤とは、分子中に加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基を有する化合物である。なお、アルコキシ基等の加水分解性基は、珪素原子に結合している。
 加水分解性基とは、珪素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び/又は縮合反応によってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、及び、アルケニルオキシ基が挙げられる。加水分解性基が炭素原子を有する場合、その炭素数は6以下であることが好ましく、4以下であることがより好ましい。特に、炭素数4以下のアルコキシ基又は炭素数4以下のアルケニルオキシ基が好ましい。
 また、シランカップリング剤は基板と硬化膜間の密着性を向上させるため、フッ素原子及び珪素原子(ただし、加水分解性基が結合した珪素原子は除く)を含まないことが好ましく、フッ素原子、珪素原子(ただし、加水分解性基が結合した珪素原子は除く)、珪素原子で置換されたアルキレン基、炭素数8以上の直鎖状アルキル基、及び、炭素数3以上の分鎖アルキル基は含まないことが望ましい。
〔Silane coupling agent〕
The composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent.
A silane coupling agent is a compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups in the molecule. Note that a hydrolyzable group such as an alkoxy group is bonded to a silicon atom.
The hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond by a hydrolysis reaction and / or a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and an alkenyloxy group. When the hydrolyzable group has a carbon atom, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 or less, and more preferably 4 or less. In particular, an alkoxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms is preferable.
In order to improve the adhesion between the substrate and the cured film, the silane coupling agent preferably does not contain a fluorine atom and a silicon atom (excluding a silicon atom to which a hydrolyzable group is bonded). Silicon atoms (excluding silicon atoms to which hydrolyzable groups are bonded), alkylene groups substituted with silicon atoms, linear alkyl groups having 8 or more carbon atoms, and branched alkyl groups having 3 or more carbon atoms are It is desirable not to include.
 シランカップリング剤は、以下の式(Z)で表される基を有することが好ましい。*は結合位置を表す。
 式(Z) *-Si-(RZ1
 式(Z)中、RZ1は加水分解性基を表し、その定義は上述の通りである。
The silane coupling agent preferably has a group represented by the following formula (Z). * Represents a bonding position.
Formula (Z) * -Si- (R Z1 ) 3
In the formula (Z), R Z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition thereof is as described above.
 シランカップリング剤は、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、エポキシ基、及び、オキセタニル基からなる群から選択される1種以上の硬化性官能基を有することが好ましい。硬化性官能基は、直接、珪素原子に結合してもよく、連結基を介して珪素原子に結合していてもよい。
 なお、上記シランカップリング剤に含まれる硬化性官能基の好適態様としては、ラジカル重合性基も挙げられる。
The silane coupling agent preferably has one or more curable functional groups selected from the group consisting of a (meth) acryloyloxy group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group. The curable functional group may be directly bonded to the silicon atom, or may be bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group.
In addition, a radically polymerizable group is also mentioned as a suitable aspect of the curable functional group contained in the said silane coupling agent.
 シランカップリング剤の分子量は特に制限されず、取り扱い性の点から、100~1000の場合が多く、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、270以上が好ましく、270~1000がより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the silane coupling agent is not particularly limited, and is often 100 to 1000 from the viewpoint of handleability, and is preferably 270 or more and more preferably 270 to 1000 from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
 シランカップリング剤の好適態様の一つとしては、式(W)で表されるシランカップリング剤Xが挙げられる。
 式(W)   RZ2-Lz-Si-(RZ1
 Rz1は、加水分解性基を表し、定義は上述の通りである。
 Rz2は、硬化性官能基を表し、定義は上述のとおりであり、好適範囲も上述の通りである。
 Lzは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Lzが2価の連結基を表す場合、2価の連結基としては、ハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアルキレン基、ハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアリーレン基、-NR12-、-CONR12-、-CO-、-CO-、SONR12-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、又は、これらの組み合わせが挙げられる。なかでも、炭素数2~10のハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアルキレン基及び炭素数6~12のハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアリーレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種、又は、これらの基と-NR12-、-CONR12-、-CO-、-CO-、SONR12-、-O-、-S-、及びSO-からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の基との組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、炭素数2~10のハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアルキレン基、-CO-、-O-、-CO-、-CONR12-、又は、これらの基の組み合わせからなる基がより好ましい。ここで、上記R12は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。
One preferred embodiment of the silane coupling agent is a silane coupling agent X represented by the formula (W).
Formula (W) R Z2 -Lz-Si- (R Z1 ) 3
R z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition is as described above.
R z2 represents a curable functional group, the definition is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
Lz represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. If Lz represents a divalent linking group, the divalent As the linking group, an alkylene group optionally substituted with a halogen atom, an arylene group optionally halogen atoms substituted, -NR 12 -, - CONR 12 -, - CO -, - CO 2 -, SO 2 NR 12 -, - O -, - S -, - SO 2 -, or combinations thereof. Among them, at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms and an arylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or At least selected from the group consisting of these groups and —NR 12 —, —CONR 12 —, —CO—, —CO 2 —, SO 2 NR 12 —, —O—, —S—, and SO 2 —. A group composed of a combination with one kind of group is preferable, an alkylene group which may be substituted by a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, —CO 2 —, —O—, —CO—, —CONR 12 —, or A group consisting of a combination of these groups is more preferred. Here, R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 シランカップリング剤Xとしては、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-メチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-602)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-トリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-603)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-トリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBE-602)、γ-アミノプロピル-トリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-903)、γ-アミノプロピル-トリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-503)、及び、グリシドキシオクチルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-4803)などが挙げられる。 As the silane coupling agent X, N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-methyldimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-602 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-trimethoxy Silane (trade name KBM-603 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-602 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), γ-aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (Trade name KBM-903 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), γ-aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-903 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (trade name manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) KBM-503) and glycidoxyoctyltrimethoxysilane (trade name, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) KBM-4803) and the like.
 シランカップリング剤の他の好適態様としては、分子内に少なくとも珪素原子と窒素原子と硬化性官能基とを有し、かつ、珪素原子に結合した加水分解性基を有するシランカップリング剤Yが挙げられる。
 このシランカップリング剤Yは、分子内に少なくとも1つの珪素原子を有していればよく、珪素原子は、以下の原子又は置換基と結合できる。結合しうる原子又は置換基は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アルキル基及び/又はアリール基で置換可能なアミノ基、シリル基、炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基などが挙げられる。これらの置換基は更に、シリル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、チオアルコキシ基、アルキル基及び/又はアリール基で置換可能なアミノ基、ハロゲン原子、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アミド基、ウレア基、アンモニウム基、アルキルアンモニウム基、カルボン酸基又はその塩、及び、スルホ基又はその塩などで置換されていてもよい。
 なお、珪素原子には少なくとも一つの加水分解性基が結合している。加水分解性基の定義は、上述の通りである。
 シランカップリング剤Yには、式(Z)で表される基が含まれていてもよい。
As another preferred embodiment of the silane coupling agent, a silane coupling agent Y having at least a silicon atom, a nitrogen atom and a curable functional group in the molecule and having a hydrolyzable group bonded to the silicon atom is provided. Can be mentioned.
The silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one silicon atom in the molecule, and the silicon atom can be bonded to the following atoms or substituents. The bondable atom or substituent includes a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkyl group and / or an amino group that can be substituted with an aryl group, silyl Group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group, and the like. These substituents further include an amino group, a halogen atom, a sulfonamide group, a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an alkyl group and / or an aryl group. It may be substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amide group, a urea group, an ammonium group, an alkylammonium group, a carboxylic acid group or a salt thereof, and a sulfo group or a salt thereof.
Note that at least one hydrolyzable group is bonded to the silicon atom. The definition of the hydrolyzable group is as described above.
The silane coupling agent Y may contain a group represented by the formula (Z).
 シランカップリング剤Yは、分子内に窒素原子を少なくとも1つ以上有し、窒素原子は、2級アミノ基又は3級アミノ基の形態で存在することが好ましく、即ち、窒素原子は置換基として少なくとも1つの有機基を有することが好ましい。なお、アミノ基の構造としては、含窒素ヘテロ環の部分構造の形態で分子内に存在してもよく、アニリンなど置換アミノ基として存在していてもよい。
 ここで、有機基としては、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、又は、これらの組み合わせなどが挙げられる。これらは更に置換基を有してもよく、導入可能な置換基としては、シリル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、チオアルコキシ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルボニルオキシ基、アミド基、ウレア基、アルキレンオキシ基アンモニウム基、アルキルアンモニウム基、カルボン酸基又はその塩、及び、スルホ基などが挙げられる。
 また、窒素原子は、任意の有機連結基を介して硬化性官能基と結合していることが好ましい。好ましい有機連結基としては、上述の窒素原子及びそれに結合する有機基に導入可能な置換基をが挙げられる。
The silane coupling agent Y has at least one nitrogen atom in the molecule, and the nitrogen atom is preferably present in the form of a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group, that is, the nitrogen atom is used as a substituent. It preferably has at least one organic group. The amino group structure may exist in the molecule in the form of a partial structure of a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, or may exist as a substituted amino group such as aniline.
Here, examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a combination thereof. These may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent that can be introduced include a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a sulfonamide. Group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbonyloxy group, amide group, urea group, alkyleneoxy group ammonium group, alkylammonium group, carboxylic acid group or salt thereof, and sulfo group.
Moreover, it is preferable that the nitrogen atom is couple | bonded with the curable functional group through arbitrary organic coupling groups. Preferred examples of the organic linking group include the above-described nitrogen atom and substituents that can be introduced into the organic group bonded thereto.
 シランカップリング剤Yに含まれる硬化性官能基の定義は、上述の通りであり、好適範囲も上述の通りである。
 シランカップリング剤Yには、硬化性官能基は一分子中に少なくとも1つ以上有していればよいが、硬化性官能基を2以上有する態様をとることも可能であり、感度及び安定性の点からは、硬化性官能基を2~20つ有することが好ましく、4~15つ有することがより好ましく、6~10つ有することが更に好ましい。
The definition of the curable functional group contained in the silane coupling agent Y is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
The silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one curable functional group in one molecule, but it is also possible to take an embodiment having two or more curable functional groups, sensitivity and stability. From this point, it is preferable to have 2 to 20 curable functional groups, more preferably 4 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
 シランカップリング剤X及びシランカップリング剤Yの分子量は特に制限されないが、上述した範囲(270以上が好ましい)が挙げられる。 The molecular weights of the silane coupling agent X and the silane coupling agent Y are not particularly limited, but include the above-described ranges (preferably 270 or more).
 本発明の組成物中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、組成物中の全固形分に対して、0.1~10質量%が好ましく、0.5~8質量%がより好ましく、1.0~6質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the silane coupling agent in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content in the composition. More preferably, it is 0 to 6% by mass.
 本発明の組成物は、シランカップリング剤を1種単独で含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。組成物がシランカップリング剤を2種以上含む場合は、その合計が上記範囲内であればよい。 The composition of the present invention may contain one silane coupling agent or two or more silane coupling agents. When a composition contains 2 or more types of silane coupling agents, the sum should just be in the said range.
(アルカリ可溶性樹脂)
 本発明の組成物は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有していてもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、線状有機ポリマーを用いることが好ましい。このような線状有機ポリマーとしては、公知のものを任意に使用できる。好ましくは、水現像又は弱アルカリ水現像を可能とするために、水又は弱アルカリ水に可溶性又は膨潤性である線状有機ポリマーが挙げられる。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、線状有機ポリマーであって、分子(好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂が好ましい。
 耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、又は、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、又は、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性を促進する基(以下、酸基ともいう)としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、フェノール性水酸基などが挙げられるが、有機溶媒に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、カルボン酸基がより好ましい。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
(Alkali-soluble resin)
The composition of the present invention may contain an alkali-soluble resin.
It is preferable to use a linear organic polymer as the alkali-soluble resin. As such a linear organic polymer, a well-known thing can be used arbitrarily. Preferably, a linear organic polymer that is soluble or swellable in water or weak alkaline water is used to enable water development or weak alkaline water development.
The alkali-soluble resin is a linear organic polymer having at least one group that promotes alkali solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). Alkali-soluble resins are preferred.
From the viewpoint of heat resistance, a polyhydroxystyrene resin, a polysiloxane resin, an acrylic resin, an acrylamide resin, or an acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resin is preferable, and from the viewpoint of developing property control, an acrylic resin, Acrylamide resins or acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
Examples of groups that promote alkali solubility (hereinafter also referred to as acid groups) include carboxylic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, and phenolic hydroxyl groups, but are soluble in organic solvents and weakly alkaline. Those that can be developed with an aqueous solution are preferred, and carboxylic acid groups are more preferred. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、例えば、側鎖にカルボン酸基を有するラジカル重合体、例えば特開昭59-44615号、特公昭54-34327号、特公昭58-12577号、特公昭54-25957号、特開昭54-92723号、特開昭59-53836号、特開昭59-71048号に記載されているもの、すなわち、カルボン酸基を有するモノマーを単独又は共重合させた樹脂、酸無水物を有するモノマーを単独又は共重合させ酸無水物ユニットを加水分解、ハーフエステル化又はハーフアミド化させた樹脂、エポキシ樹脂を不飽和モノカルボン酸及び酸無水物で変性させたエポキシアクリレート等が挙げられる。カルボン酸基を有するモノマーの例としては、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、及び、4-カルボキシルスチレン等が挙げられ、酸無水物を有するモノマーとしては、無水マレイン酸が挙げられる。また、同様に側鎖にカルボン酸基を有する酸性セルロース誘導体も挙げられる。この他に水酸基を有する重合体に環状酸無水物を付加させたものなどが有用である。
 また、欧州特許第993966号、欧州特許第1204000号、特開2001-318463号等の各公報に記載の酸基を有するアセタール変性ポリビニルアルコール系バインダーポリマーは、膜強度、現像性のバランスに優れており、好適である。
 更に、この他に水溶性線状有機ポリマーとして、ポリビニルピロリドン又はポリエチレンオキサイド等が有用である。
Examples of the alkali-soluble resin include radical polymers having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-54-92723, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, ie, resins or acid anhydrides obtained by homopolymerizing or copolymerizing monomers having a carboxylic acid group Examples include a resin obtained by hydrolyzing, half-esterifying or half-amidating an acid anhydride unit, or an epoxy acrylate obtained by modifying an epoxy resin with an unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and an acid anhydride. . Examples of the monomer having a carboxylic acid group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, and 4-carboxyl styrene. Examples of the monomer having an acid anhydride include anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned. Similarly, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain are also included. In addition, those obtained by adding a cyclic acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group are useful.
Further, the acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder polymer having an acid group described in European Patent Nos. 993966, 120204000, and 2001-318463 has an excellent balance of film strength and developability. It is preferable.
In addition, polyvinyl pyrrolidone or polyethylene oxide is useful as the water-soluble linear organic polymer.
 特に、これらの中でも、〔ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/必要に応じてその他の付加重合性ビニルモノマー〕共重合体、及び〔アリル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/必要に応じてその他の付加重合性ビニルモノマー〕共重合体は、膜強度、感度、及び、現像性のバランスに優れており、好適である。
 市販品としては、例えばアクリベースFF-187、FF-426(藤倉化成社製)、アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒(株))、及び、ダイセルオルネクス(株)製サイクロマーP(ACA)230AAなどが挙げられる。
In particular, among these, [benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other addition-polymerizable vinyl monomer as required] copolymer, and [allyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / necessary The other addition polymerizable vinyl monomer] copolymer is suitable because it is excellent in the balance of film strength, sensitivity, and developability.
Commercially available products include, for example, Acrybase FF-187, FF-426 (manufactured by Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd.), Acrycure-RD-F8 (Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), and Cyclomer P (ACA) manufactured by Daicel Ornex Corporation. 230AA etc. are mentioned.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用できる。ラジカル重合法でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類及びその量、並びに、溶剤の種類等の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めることもできる。 For the production of the alkali-soluble resin, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, and type of solvent when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and experimental conditions Can also be determined.
 また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂として、グラフト鎖を有する構造単位と、酸基(アルカリ可溶性基)を有する構造単位と、を有するポリマーを使用することも好ましい。
 グラフト鎖を有する構造単位の定義は、上述した分散剤が有するグラフト鎖を有する構造単位と同義であり、また好適範囲も同様である。
 酸基としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、及び、フェノール性水酸基などが挙げられ、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基のうち少なくとも1種が好ましく、カルボン酸基がより好ましい。
Moreover, it is also preferable to use a polymer having a structural unit having a graft chain and a structural unit having an acid group (alkali-soluble group) as the alkali-soluble resin.
The definition of the structural unit which has a graft chain is synonymous with the structural unit which has the graft chain which the dispersing agent mentioned above has, and its suitable range is also the same.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group, and at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group is preferable. Carboxylic acid groups are more preferred.
 酸基を有する構造単位としては、下記一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)で表さる単量体に由来の構造単位から選択された1種以上の構造単位が好ましい。 The structural unit having an acid group is preferably at least one structural unit selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (vii) to (ix).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中、R21、R22、及びR23は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等)、又は炭素数1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)を表す。
 一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中、R21、R22、及びR23は、より好ましくは、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基であり、更に好ましくは、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基である。一般式(vii)中、R21及びR23は、それぞれ水素原子であることが特に好ましい。
In the general formulas (vii) to (ix), R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number 1 to 6 alkyl groups (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.) are represented.
In general formula (vii) to general formula (ix), R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are more preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. In general formula (vii), R 21 and R 23 are each particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(vii)中のXは、酸素原子(-O-)又はイミノ基(-NH-)を表し、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 また、一般式(viii)中のYは、メチン基又は窒素原子を表す。
X 2 in the general formula (vii) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
Y in the general formula (viii) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
 また、一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中のLは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、2価の脂肪族基(例えば、アルキレン基、置換アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、置換アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、及び置換アルキニレン基)、2価の芳香族基(例えば、アリーレン基、及び置換アリーレン基)、2価の複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ結合(-NR41’-、ここでR41’は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、カルボニル結合(-CO-)、又は、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 In the general formulas (vii) to (ix), L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), and a divalent aromatic group (for example, arylene). Group, substituted arylene group), divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino bond (—NR 41 ′ —, here R 41 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), or a combination thereof.
 2価の脂肪族基は、分岐状でも環状でもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基よりも飽和脂肪族基の方が好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent aliphatic group may be branched or cyclic. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環のうち1つ以上が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R42、ここでR42は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocycle. One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle. Moreover, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an oxo group (═O), a thioxo group (═S), an imino group (═NH), a substituted imino group (═N—R 42 , where R 42 is an aliphatic group, Aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
 Lは、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、オキシアルキレン構造を含む2価の連結基であることが好ましい。オキシアルキレン構造は、オキシエチレン構造又はオキシプロピレン構造であることがより好ましい。また、Lは、オキシアルキレン構造を2以上繰り返して含むポリオキシアルキレン構造を含んでいてもよい。ポリオキシアルキレン構造としては、ポリオキシエチレン構造又はポリオキシプロピレン構造が好ましい。ポリオキシエチレン構造は、-(OCHCH)n-で表され、nは、2以上の整数が好ましく、2~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 L 2 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure. The oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure. L 2 may contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures. The polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure. The polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中、Zは、酸基であり、カルボン酸基であることが好ましい。 In the general formulas (vii) to (ix), Z 2 is an acid group, preferably a carboxylic acid group.
 一般式(ix)中、R24、R25、及びR26は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子等)、炭素数1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等)、-Z、又は-L-Zを表す。ここでL及びZは、上記におけるL及びZと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。R24、R25、及びR26としては、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In the general formula (ix), R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or an alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. group (e.g., methyl group, ethyl group, and propyl group), - represents a Z 2, or -L 2 -Z 2. Here L 2 and Z 2 has the same meaning as L 2 and Z 2 in the above, and preferred examples are also the same. R 24 , R 25 and R 26 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(vii)で表される単量体として、R21、R22、及びR23がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含む2価の連結基であって、Xが酸素原子又はイミノ基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、一般式(vii)で表される単量体として、R21が水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基であって、Zがカルボン酸基であって、Yがメチン基である化合物が好ましい。
 更に、一般式(ix)で表される単量体として、R24、R25、及びR26がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
As the monomer represented by the general formula (vii), R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 2 is a divalent alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure. A compound in which X 2 is an oxygen atom or an imino group and Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (vii), R 21 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L 2 is an alkylene group, Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group, and Y is methine. Compounds that are groups are preferred.
Furthermore, as the monomer represented by the general formula (ix), a compound in which R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
 上記アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、公知の方法により合成できる。 The alkali-soluble resin can be synthesized by a known method.
 上記アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、酸基を有する構造単位を1種又は2種以上有してもよい。
 酸基を有する構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、上記アルカリ可溶性樹脂の総質量に対して、5~95%が好ましく、アルカリ現像による画像強度のダメージ抑制という点から、10~90%がより好ましい。
The alkali-soluble resin may have one or more structural units having an acid group.
The content of the structural unit having an acid group is preferably 5 to 95% in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the alkali-soluble resin, and is 10 to 90% from the viewpoint of suppressing image strength damage due to alkali development. More preferred.
 本発明の組成物におけるアルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~25質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the alkali-soluble resin in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass and more preferably 0.3 to 25% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. .
〔溶剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、溶剤を含有していてもよい。
 溶剤としては、水又は有機溶媒が挙げられる。
 有機溶媒としては、例えば、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサン、酢酸エチル、エチレンジクロライド、テトラヒドロフラン、トルエン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、アセチルアセトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、ジアセトンアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノイソプロピルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシプロパノール、メトキシメトキシエタノール、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシプロピルアセテート、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、γ-ブチロラクトン、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、及び、乳酸エチルなどが挙げられる。
〔solvent〕
The composition of the present invention may contain a solvent.
Examples of the solvent include water or an organic solvent.
Examples of the organic solvent include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexane, ethyl acetate, ethylene dichloride, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, acetylacetone. , Cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, diacetone alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoisopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropanol, methoxymethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol mono Chill ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, γ-butyrolactone, ethyl acetate, Examples include butyl acetate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate.
 溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 溶剤を2種以上組み合わせて用いる場合、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、及びプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートからなる群から選択される2種以上で構成されることが好ましい。
 本発明の組成物に含まれる溶剤の量としては、組成物の全質量に対し、10~90質量%であることが好ましく、20~85質量%であることがより好ましい。
A solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
When two or more solvents are used in combination, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, It is preferably composed of two or more selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
The amount of the solvent contained in the composition of the present invention is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, and more preferably 20 to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition.
〔その他〕
 本発明の組成物には、紫外線吸収剤が含まれていてもよい。これにより、パターンの形状をより優れた(精細な)ものにできる。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、サリシレート系、ベンゾフェノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、置換アクリロニトリル系、及び、トリアジン系の紫外線吸収剤が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2012-068418号公報の段落0137~0142(対応するUS2012/0068292の段落0251~0254)の化合物が使用でき、これらの内容が援用でき、本明細書に組み込まれる。
 他にジエチルアミノ-フェニルスルホニル系紫外線吸収剤(大東化学製、商品名:UV-503)なども挙げられる。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、特開2012-32556号公報の段落0134~0148に例示される化合物も挙げられる。
 本発明の組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含んでも含まなくてもよいが、含む場合、紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~15質量%が好ましく、0.01~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1~5質量%が更に好ましい。
[Others]
The composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Thereby, the shape of a pattern can be made more excellent (fine).
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include salicylate-based, benzophenone-based, benzotriazole-based, substituted acrylonitrile-based, and triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers. As specific examples of these, compounds of paragraphs 0137 to 0142 (corresponding to paragraphs 0251 to 0254 of US2012 / 0068292) of JP2012-068418A can be used, and the contents thereof can be incorporated and incorporated in the present specification. .
Other examples include diethylamino-phenylsulfonyl ultraviolet absorbers (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: UV-503).
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include compounds exemplified in paragraphs 0134 to 0148 of JP2012-32556A.
The composition of the present invention may or may not contain an ultraviolet absorber, but when it is included, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.001 to 15% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition. 0.01 to 10% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1 to 5% by mass is still more preferable.
 本発明の組成物には、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、及び、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。特に、本発明の組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性又は省液性をより改善できる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780、同F781F(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 他の界面活性剤の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-249417号公報の段落0174~0177に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。
 界面活性剤の添加量は、組成物の全質量に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。
The composition of the present invention may contain various surfactants from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. In particular, the composition of the present invention can further improve the uniformity of coating thickness or the liquid-saving property because the liquid property (particularly fluidity) is further improved by containing a fluorine-based surfactant.
Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781F (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
Specific examples of other surfactants include, for example, surfactants described in paragraphs 0174 to 0177 of JP2013-249417A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
The addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass and more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition.
 上記成分以外にも、本発明の組成物は、以下の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。例えば、増感剤、共増感剤、架橋剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、重合禁止剤、可塑剤、希釈剤、感脂化剤、密着促進剤、及び、その他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、酸化防止剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)等の公知の添加剤が挙げられる。
 これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183~0228(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の[0237]~[0309])、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0102、段落番号0103~0104、段落番号0107~0109、特開2013-195480号公報の段落番号0159~0184等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In addition to the above components, the composition of the present invention may further contain the following components. For example, sensitizers, co-sensitizers, crosslinking agents, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, polymerization inhibitors, plasticizers, diluents, sensitizers, adhesion promoters, and other auxiliaries Well-known additives such as conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling accelerators, antioxidants, fragrances, surface tension adjusting agents, chain transfer agents, etc. .
These components include, for example, paragraph numbers 0183 to 0228 of JP2012-003225A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812 [0237] to [0309]), JP2008-250074A. Paragraph numbers 0101 to 0102, paragraph numbers 0103 to 0104, paragraph numbers 0107 to 0109, paragraph numbers 0159 to 0184 in JP 2013-195480 A, and the like can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. .
 本発明の組成物の固形分濃度は5~50質量%であることが好ましく、形成される着色層の厚み及び遮光性のバランスの点で、15~40質量%であることがより好ましい。 The solid content concentration of the composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, and more preferably 15 to 40% by mass from the viewpoint of the balance between the thickness of the formed colored layer and the light shielding property.
<組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の組成物は、上述した各種成分を公知の混合方法(例えば、攪拌機、ホモジナイザー、高圧乳化装置、湿式粉砕機、湿式分散機)により混合して調製できる。
 本発明の組成物は、異物の除去又は欠陥の低減などの目的で、フィルタで濾過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているものであれば特に制限されることない。例えば、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン等のポリアミド系樹脂、並びに、ポリエチレン及びポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含む)等によるフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でも、ポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)、又は、ナイロンが好ましい。
 フィルタの孔径は、0.1~7.0μm程度が適しており、0.2~2.5μmが好ましく、0.2~1.5μmがより好ましく、0.3~0.7μmが更に好ましい。上記範囲であれば、顔料のろ過詰まりを抑えつつ、顔料に含まれる不純物又は凝集物など、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。その際、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上でもよい。異なるフィルタを組み合わせて2回以上フィルタリングを行う場合は1回目のフィルタリングの孔径より2回目以降の孔径が同じ、又は、大きい方が好ましい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照できる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)又は株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択できる。
 第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用できる。第2のフィルタの孔径は、0.2~10.0μm程度が適しており、0.2~7.0μmが好ましく、0.3~6.0μmがより好ましい。
<Method for preparing composition>
The composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the various components described above by a known mixing method (for example, a stirrer, a homogenizer, a high-pressure emulsifier, a wet pulverizer, a wet disperser).
The composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects. The filter is not particularly limited as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration. For example, a filter made of a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), a polyamide resin such as nylon, and a polyolefin resin (including high density and ultra high molecular weight) such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) can be used. Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) or nylon is preferable.
The pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.1 to 7.0 μm, preferably 0.2 to 2.5 μm, more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 μm, and still more preferably 0.3 to 0.7 μm. If it is the said range, it will become possible to remove fine foreign materials, such as the impurity contained in a pigment, or an aggregate, reliably, suppressing the filtration clogging of a pigment.
When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or twice or more. When filtering two or more times by combining different filters, it is preferable that the second and subsequent pore diameters are the same or larger than the pore diameter of the first filtering. Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, it can select from the various filters which Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Integris Co., Ltd. (former Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), KITZ micro filter, etc. provide, for example.
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used. The pore size of the second filter is suitably about 0.2 to 10.0 μm, preferably 0.2 to 7.0 μm, and more preferably 0.3 to 6.0 μm.
<硬化膜及びその製造方法>
 上述した組成物を用いることにより、硬化膜を形成できる。
 硬化膜の厚みは特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、0.2~25μmが好ましく、1.0~10μmがより好ましい。
 上記厚みは平均厚みであり、硬化膜の任意の5点以上の厚みを測定し、それらを算術平均した値である。
<Hardened film and manufacturing method thereof>
A cured film can be formed by using the composition described above.
The thickness of the cured film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.2 to 25 μm, more preferably 1.0 to 10 μm, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
The above thickness is an average thickness, and is a value obtained by measuring the thicknesses of five or more arbitrary points of the cured film and arithmetically averaging them.
 硬化膜の製造方法は特に制限されないが、上述した硬化性組成物を基板上に塗布して塗膜を形成して、塗膜に対して硬化処理を施し、硬化膜を製造する方法が挙げられる。
 硬化処理の方法は特に制限されず、光硬化処理又は熱硬化処理が挙げられ、パターン形成が容易である点から、光硬化処理(特に、活性光線又は放射線を照射することによる硬化処理)が好ましい。
 なお、使用される基板の種類は特に制限されない。なかでも、固体撮像装置内に硬化膜を配置する場合は、基板として、固体撮像装置内の各種部材(例えば、赤外光カットフィルタ、固体撮像素子の外周部、ウェハーレベルレンズ外周部、及び、固体撮像素子裏面など)などが好ましい。
Although the manufacturing method in particular of a cured film is not restrict | limited, The method of apply | coating the curable composition mentioned above on a board | substrate, forming a coating film, performing a hardening process with respect to a coating film, and manufacturing a cured film is mentioned. .
The method of the curing treatment is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a photocuring treatment or a thermosetting treatment, and a photocuring treatment (particularly a curing treatment by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation) is preferable from the viewpoint of easy pattern formation. .
The type of substrate used is not particularly limited. In particular, when a cured film is disposed in the solid-state imaging device, various members in the solid-state imaging device (for example, an infrared light cut filter, an outer peripheral portion of the solid-state imaging device, an outer peripheral portion of a wafer level lens, and The back surface of the solid-state imaging device is preferable.
 パターン状の硬化膜を製造する場合の好適態様としては、基板上に、本発明の組成物をスピンコートにより塗布して組成物層を形成する工程(以下、適宜「組成物層形成工程」と略称する。)と、組成物層を活性光線又は放射線を照射することにより露光する工程(以下、適宜「露光工程」と略称する。)と、露光後の組成物層をアルカリ現像して硬化膜を形成する工程(以下、適宜「現像工程」と略称する。)と、を含む態様が挙げられる。
 具体的には、本発明の組成物を、直接又は他の層を介して基板上にスピンコートにより塗布して、組成物層を形成し(組成物層形成工程)、所定のマスクパターンを介して活性光線又は放射線を照射することにより露光し、光照射された塗布膜部分だけを硬化させ(露光工程)、アルカリ現像液で現像することによって(現像工程)、パターン状の硬化膜を製造できる。
 以下、上記態様における各工程について説明する。
A preferred embodiment in the case of producing a patterned cured film is a step of applying a composition of the present invention on a substrate by spin coating to form a composition layer (hereinafter referred to as “composition layer forming step” as appropriate). Abbreviated), a step of exposing the composition layer by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation (hereinafter abbreviated as “exposure step” as appropriate), and a cured film obtained by alkali development of the exposed composition layer. And a step of forming (hereinafter abbreviated as “development step” where appropriate).
Specifically, the composition of the present invention is applied onto a substrate directly or via another layer by spin coating to form a composition layer (composition layer forming step), and through a predetermined mask pattern. It is possible to produce a pattern-like cured film by exposing it to irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, curing only the coating film portion irradiated with light (exposure process), and developing with an alkaline developer (development process). .
Hereinafter, each process in the said aspect is demonstrated.
〔組成物層形成工程〕
 組成物層形成工程では、基板上に、本発明の組成物を塗布して組成物層を形成する。
 基板の種類は特に制限されないが、固体撮像装置内に硬化膜を配置する場合は、例えば、固体撮像装置内の各種部材(例えば、赤外光カットフィルタ、固体撮像素子の外周部、ウェハーレベルレンズ外周部、及び、固体撮像素子裏面など)などが挙げられる。
 基板上への本発明の組成物の塗布方法としては、スピンコート、スリット塗布、インクジェット法、スプレー塗布、回転塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布、及び、スクリーン印刷法等の各種の塗布方法を適用できるが、スピンコートが好ましい。
 基板上に塗布された組成物は、通常、70~110℃で2~4分間程度の条件下で乾燥され、組成物層が形成される。
[Composition layer forming step]
In the composition layer forming step, a composition layer is formed by applying the composition of the present invention on a substrate.
The type of the substrate is not particularly limited, but when a cured film is disposed in the solid-state imaging device, for example, various members in the solid-state imaging device (for example, infrared light cut filter, outer peripheral portion of the solid-state imaging device, wafer level lens) And the like, and the like.
As a coating method of the composition of the present invention on the substrate, various coating methods such as spin coating, slit coating, ink jet method, spray coating, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing method are applied. Although spin coating is possible, spin coating is preferred.
The composition coated on the substrate is usually dried at 70 to 110 ° C. for about 2 to 4 minutes to form a composition layer.
〔露光工程〕
 露光工程では、組成物層形成工程において形成された組成物層をマスクを介して活性光線又は放射線を照射することにより露光し、光照射された塗布膜部分だけを硬化させる。
 露光は放射線の照射により行うことが好ましく、露光に際して用いることができる放射線としては、特に、g線、h線、及び、i線等の紫外線が好ましく、光源としては高圧水銀灯が好まれる。照射強度は5~1500mJ/cmが好ましく、10~1000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
[Exposure process]
In the exposure step, the composition layer formed in the composition layer forming step is exposed by irradiating actinic rays or radiation through a mask, and only the coating film portion irradiated with the light is cured.
The exposure is preferably performed by irradiation of radiation, and as radiation that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line, h-line, and i-line are particularly preferable, and a high-pressure mercury lamp is preferable as a light source. The irradiation intensity is preferably 5 ~ 1500mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ~ 1000mJ / cm 2.
〔現像工程〕
 露光工程に次いで、現像処理(現像工程)を行い、露光工程における光未照射部分を現像液に溶出させる。これにより、光硬化した部分だけが残る。
 現像液としては、有機アルカリ現像液を用いることが望ましい。現像温度は通常20~30℃であり、現像時間は通常20~90秒である。
 アルカリ水溶液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、及び、メタ硅酸ナトリウム等のアルカリ性化合物を含む無機系現像液、及び、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5,4,0]-7-ウンデセン等のアルカリ性化合物を含む有機アルカリ現像液が挙げられる。
 上記アルカリ性化合物の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.005~0.5質量%がより好ましい。
 アルカリ水溶液には、例えばメタノール、及び、エタノール等の水溶性有機溶媒、又は、界面活性剤等を適量添加することもできる。なお、このようなアルカリ水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、一般に現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)する。
[Development process]
Subsequent to the exposure step, development processing (development step) is performed to elute the light non-irradiated portion in the exposure step into the developer. Thereby, only the photocured part remains.
As the developer, it is desirable to use an organic alkali developer. The development temperature is usually 20 to 30 ° C., and the development time is usually 20 to 90 seconds.
Examples of the alkaline aqueous solution include an inorganic developer containing an alkaline compound such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium oxalate, and sodium metaoxalate, and aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, Diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, and 1,8-diazabicyclo- [ And an organic alkali developer containing an alkaline compound such as 5,4,0] -7-undecene.
The concentration of the alkaline compound is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.005 to 0.5% by mass.
An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol and ethanol, or a surfactant can also be added to the alkaline aqueous solution. In the case of using a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution, it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
 なお、組成物層形成工程、露光工程、及び現像工程を行った後に、必要により、形成されたパターン状の遮光膜を加熱及び/又は露光により硬化する硬化工程を実施してもよい。 In addition, after performing a composition layer formation process, an exposure process, and a image development process, you may implement the hardening process which hardens | cures the formed pattern-shaped light shielding film by heating and / or exposure as needed.
<遮光膜付き赤外光カットフィルタ、固体撮像装置>
 着色剤として黒色顔料を用いた場合は、上述した硬化膜はいわゆる遮光膜として好適に適用できる。また、このような遮光膜は、固体撮像装置に好適に適用できる。
 以下では、まず、本発明の遮光膜を有する固体撮像装置の第1実施形態について詳述する。
 図2及び図3に示すように、固体撮像装置2は、固体撮像素子としてCMOS(相補性金属酸化膜半導体)センサ3と、このCMOSセンサ3が実装される回路基板4と、回路基板4を保持するセラミック製のセラミック基板5とを備えている。また、固体撮像装置2は、セラミック基板5に保持され、CMOSセンサ3に向かう赤外光(IR)をカットするIRカットフィルタ6と、撮影レンズ7と、この撮影レンズ7を保持するレンズホルダ8と、このレンズホルダ8を移動自在に保持する保持筒9とを備えている。また、CMOSセンサ3に代えて、CCD(電荷結合素子)センサ又は有機CMOSセンサを設けてもよい。
 セラミック基板5は、CMOSセンサ3が挿入される開口5aが形成され、枠状となっており、CMOSセンサ3の側面を囲んでいる。この状態で、CMOSセンサ3が実装された回路基板4は、接着剤(例えば、エポキシ系接着剤、以下同様)によりセラミック基板5に固定されている。回路基板4には、各種回路パターンが形成されている。
<Infrared light cut filter with light shielding film, solid-state imaging device>
When a black pigment is used as the colorant, the above-described cured film can be suitably applied as a so-called light shielding film. Such a light shielding film can be suitably applied to a solid-state imaging device.
In the following, a first embodiment of a solid-state imaging device having a light shielding film of the present invention will be described in detail.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the solid-state imaging device 2 includes a CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) sensor 3 as a solid-state imaging device, a circuit board 4 on which the CMOS sensor 3 is mounted, and a circuit board 4. And a ceramic substrate 5 made of ceramic. The solid-state image pickup device 2 is held on a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6 that cuts infrared light (IR) toward the CMOS sensor 3, a photographing lens 7, and a lens holder 8 that holds the photographing lens 7. And a holding cylinder 9 that holds the lens holder 8 movably. Further, instead of the CMOS sensor 3, a CCD (charge coupled device) sensor or an organic CMOS sensor may be provided.
The ceramic substrate 5 has an opening 5 a into which the CMOS sensor 3 is inserted, has a frame shape, and surrounds the side surface of the CMOS sensor 3. In this state, the circuit board 4 on which the CMOS sensor 3 is mounted is fixed to the ceramic substrate 5 with an adhesive (for example, an epoxy adhesive, the same applies hereinafter). Various circuit patterns are formed on the circuit board 4.
 IRカットフィルタ6は、板状のガラスや青ガラスに赤外光を反射する反射膜が形成され、この反射膜が形成された面が入射面6aとなる。IRカットフィルタ6は、開口5aよりも一回り大きいサイズで形成され、開口5aを覆うように接着剤によりセラミック基板5に固定されている。
 撮影レンズ7の背後(図3及び図4における下方)に、CMOSセンサ3が配され、撮影レンズ7とCMOSセンサ3との間に、IRカットフィルタ6が配されている。被写体光は、撮影レンズ7、IRカットフィルタ6を通ってCMOSセンサ3の受光面に入射する。このとき、赤外光は、IRカットフィルタ6によりカットされる。
 回路基板4は、固体撮像装置2が搭載される電子機器(例えば、デジタルカメラ)に設けられた制御部に接続され、電子機器から固体撮像装置2に電力が供給される。CMOSセンサ3は、受光面上に多数のカラー画素が二次元に配列されており、各カラー画素は入射光を光電変換し、発生した信号電荷を蓄積する。
In the IR cut filter 6, a reflection film that reflects infrared light is formed on a plate-like glass or blue glass, and the surface on which the reflection film is formed becomes the incident surface 6a. The IR cut filter 6 is formed in a size slightly larger than the opening 5a, and is fixed to the ceramic substrate 5 with an adhesive so as to cover the opening 5a.
A CMOS sensor 3 is disposed behind the photographing lens 7 (downward in FIGS. 3 and 4), and an IR cut filter 6 is disposed between the photographing lens 7 and the CMOS sensor 3. The subject light enters the light receiving surface of the CMOS sensor 3 through the photographing lens 7 and the IR cut filter 6. At this time, the infrared light is cut by the IR cut filter 6.
The circuit board 4 is connected to a control unit provided in an electronic device (for example, a digital camera) on which the solid-state imaging device 2 is mounted, and power is supplied from the electronic device to the solid-state imaging device 2. In the CMOS sensor 3, a large number of color pixels are two-dimensionally arranged on the light receiving surface, and each color pixel photoelectrically converts incident light and accumulates generated signal charges.
 図3及び図4に示すように、IRカットフィルタ6の入射面6aの端部には、全周に亘って上述した遮光膜(遮光層)11が配置されており、遮光膜付き赤外光カットフィルタが形成されている。撮影レンズ7から出射され、セラミック基板5の前面(図3及び図4における上面)で反射した反射光R1が、装置内で反射又は屈折を繰り返した後にCMOSセンサ3に入射した場合、及び、撮影レンズ7から出射されたレンズホルダ8の内壁面で反射した反射光R2が、CMOSセンサ3に入射した場合には、撮影画像でフレアが発生する原因となる。遮光膜11は、CMOSセンサ3に向かう反射光R1及びR2等の有害光を遮光する。遮光膜11は、例えば、スピンコート法及びスプレーコート法で塗布されている。なお、図3及び図4では、遮光膜11の厚みを誇張して描いている。 As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the light shielding film (light shielding layer) 11 described above is arranged over the entire circumference at the end of the incident surface 6 a of the IR cut filter 6, and infrared light with a light shielding film is provided. A cut filter is formed. The reflected light R1 emitted from the photographing lens 7 and reflected by the front surface (the upper surface in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the ceramic substrate 5 is incident on the CMOS sensor 3 after being repeatedly reflected or refracted in the device, and photographing. When the reflected light R <b> 2 reflected from the inner wall surface of the lens holder 8 emitted from the lens 7 enters the CMOS sensor 3, flare occurs in the captured image. The light shielding film 11 shields harmful light such as reflected light R <b> 1 and R <b> 2 toward the CMOS sensor 3. The light shielding film 11 is applied by, for example, a spin coating method and a spray coating method. 3 and 4, the thickness of the light shielding film 11 is exaggerated.
 図5に第2実施形態の固体撮像装置20を示す。なお、第1実施形態のものと同様の構成部材には同一の符号を付し、その詳細な説明を省略する。
 固体撮像装置20は、CMOSセンサ3と、回路基板4と、セラミック基板5と、IRカットフィルタ6と、撮影レンズ7と、レンズホルダ8と、保持筒9とを備えている。IRカットフィルタ6の側端面に、全周に亘って上述した遮光膜(遮光層)21が形成されている。撮影レンズ7から出射され、セラミック基板5の前面で反射した反射光R3が、装置内で反射や屈折を繰り返した後にCMOSセンサ3に入射した場合には、撮影画像でフレアが発生する原因となる。遮光膜21は、CMOSセンサ3に向かう反射光R3等の有害光を遮光する。
FIG. 5 shows a solid-state imaging device 20 according to the second embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the structural member similar to the thing of 1st Embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.
The solid-state imaging device 20 includes a CMOS sensor 3, a circuit board 4, a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6, a photographing lens 7, a lens holder 8, and a holding cylinder 9. The above-described light shielding film (light shielding layer) 21 is formed on the side end face of the IR cut filter 6 over the entire circumference. When the reflected light R3 emitted from the photographing lens 7 and reflected by the front surface of the ceramic substrate 5 is incident on the CMOS sensor 3 after being repeatedly reflected and refracted in the apparatus, it causes flare in the photographed image. . The light shielding film 21 shields harmful light such as reflected light R <b> 3 directed toward the CMOS sensor 3.
 図6に第3実施形態の固体撮像装置30を示す。なお、第1実施形態のものと同様の構成部材には同一の符号を付し、その詳細な説明を省略する。
 固体撮像装置30は、CMOSセンサ3と、回路基板4と、セラミック基板5と、IRカットフィルタ6と、撮影レンズ7と、レンズホルダ8と、保持筒9とを備えている。IRカットフィルタ6の入射面6aの端部及び側端面に、全周に亘って上述した遮光膜(遮光層)31が形成されている。すなわち、第1、第2実施形態を組み合わせたものとなっている。この実施形態では、第1、第2実施形態よりも遮光性能が高くなるので、フレアの発生が確実に抑制される。
FIG. 6 shows a solid-state imaging device 30 according to the third embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the structural member similar to the thing of 1st Embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.
The solid-state imaging device 30 includes a CMOS sensor 3, a circuit board 4, a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6, a photographing lens 7, a lens holder 8, and a holding cylinder 9. The light-shielding film (light-shielding layer) 31 described above is formed on the end and side end surfaces of the incident surface 6a of the IR cut filter 6 over the entire circumference. That is, the first and second embodiments are combined. In this embodiment, since the light shielding performance is higher than in the first and second embodiments, the occurrence of flare is reliably suppressed.
 図7に第4実施形態の固体撮像装置40を示す。なお、第1実施形態のものと同様の構成部材には同一の符号を付し、その詳細な説明を省略する。
 固体撮像装置40は、CMOSセンサ3と、回路基板4と、セラミック基板5と、IRカットフィルタ6と、撮影レンズ7と、レンズホルダ8と、保持筒9とを備えている。IRカットフィルタ6の入射面6aの端部及び側端面に、全周に亘って上述した遮光膜(遮光層)31が形成されている。
 また、セラミック基板5の内壁面には、遮光膜(遮光層)41が形成されている。撮影レンズ7から出射され、IRカットフィルタ6を通過してセラミック基板5の内壁面で反射した反射光がCMOSセンサ3に入射した場合には、撮影画像のフレアが発生する原因となる。遮光膜41は、セラミック基板5の内壁面よりも遮光性能が高くなるので、フレアの発生が確実に抑制される。
FIG. 7 shows a solid-state imaging device 40 according to the fourth embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the structural member similar to the thing of 1st Embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.
The solid-state imaging device 40 includes a CMOS sensor 3, a circuit board 4, a ceramic substrate 5, an IR cut filter 6, a photographing lens 7, a lens holder 8, and a holding cylinder 9. The light-shielding film (light-shielding layer) 31 described above is formed on the end and side end surfaces of the incident surface 6a of the IR cut filter 6 over the entire circumference.
A light shielding film (light shielding layer) 41 is formed on the inner wall surface of the ceramic substrate 5. When reflected light that is emitted from the photographing lens 7, passes through the IR cut filter 6, and is reflected by the inner wall surface of the ceramic substrate 5 enters the CMOS sensor 3, flare of the photographed image occurs. Since the light shielding film 41 has a light shielding performance higher than that of the inner wall surface of the ceramic substrate 5, the occurrence of flare is reliably suppressed.
<カラーフィルタ>
 また、本発明の硬化膜は、カラーフィルタにも適用できる。つまり、本発明の硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタとして用いることができる。
 カラーフィルタは、CCD又はCMOS等の固体撮像素子に好適に用いることができ、特に100万画素を超えるような高解像度のCCD又はCMOS等に好適である。カラーフィルタは、例えば、CCD又はCMOSを構成する各画素の受光部と、集光するためのマイクロレンズと、の間に配置して用いることができる。
<Color filter>
Moreover, the cured film of this invention is applicable also to a color filter. That is, it can be used as a color filter having the cured film of the present invention.
The color filter can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels. For example, the color filter can be used by being disposed between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
 また、カラーフィルタは、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(有機EL)素子用として好ましく用いることができる。有機EL素子としては、白色有機EL素子が好ましい。有機EL素子は、タンデム構造であることが好ましい。有機EL素子のタンデム構造については、特開2003-45676号公報、三上明義監修、「有機EL技術開発の最前線-高輝度・高精度・長寿命化・ノウハウ集-」、技術情報協会、326-328ページ、2008年などに記載されている。有機EL素子のタンデム構造としては、例えば、基板の一面において、光反射性を備えた下部電極と光透過性を備えた上部電極との間に有機EL層を設けた構造などが挙げられる。下部電極は、可視光の波長領域において十分な反射率を有する材料により構成されていることが好ましい。有機EL層は、複数の発光層を含み、それら複数の発光層が積層された積層構造(タンデム構造)を有していることが好ましい。有機EL層は、例えば、複数の発光層には、赤色発光層、緑色発光層及び青色発光層を含むことができる。そして、複数の発光層とともに、それらは発光層を発光させるための複数の発光補助層を併せて有することが好ましい。有機EL層は、例えば、発光層と発光補助層とが交互に積層する積層構造とすることができる。こうした構造の有機EL層を有する有機EL素子は、白色光を発光することができる。その場合、有機EL素子が発光する白色光のスペクトルは、青色領域(430nm-485nm)、緑色領域(530nm-580nm)及び黄色領域(580nm-620nm)に強い極大発光ピークを有するものが好ましい。これらの発光ピークに加え更に赤色領域(650nm-700nm)に極大発光ピークを有するものがより好ましい。白色光を発光する有機EL素子(白色有機EL素子)と、本発明のカラーフィルタとを組み合わせることにより、色再現性上優れた分光が得られ、より鮮明な映像や画像を表示可能である。 Moreover, the color filter can be preferably used for an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) element. As the organic EL element, a white organic EL element is preferable. The organic EL element preferably has a tandem structure. Regarding the tandem structure of organic EL elements, JP 2003-45676 A, supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, “Frontier of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection”, Technical Information Association, 326-328 pages, 2008, etc. Examples of the tandem structure of the organic EL element include a structure in which an organic EL layer is provided between a lower electrode having light reflectivity and an upper electrode having light transmittance on one surface of a substrate. The lower electrode is preferably made of a material having a sufficient reflectance in the visible light wavelength region. The organic EL layer preferably includes a plurality of light emitting layers and has a stacked structure (tandem structure) in which the plurality of light emitting layers are stacked. For example, the organic EL layer may include a red light emitting layer, a green light emitting layer, and a blue light emitting layer in the plurality of light emitting layers. And it is preferable that they have a some light emission auxiliary layer for light-emitting a light emitting layer together with a some light emitting layer. The organic EL layer can have, for example, a stacked structure in which light emitting layers and light emitting auxiliary layers are alternately stacked. An organic EL element having an organic EL layer having such a structure can emit white light. In that case, the spectrum of white light emitted from the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 nm to 485 nm), the green region (530 nm to 580 nm), and the yellow region (580 nm to 620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm to 700 nm) are more preferable. By combining an organic EL element that emits white light (white organic EL element) and the color filter of the present invention, a spectrum excellent in color reproducibility can be obtained, and a clearer image or image can be displayed.
 カラーフィルタにおける着色パターン(着色画素)の膜厚は、2.0μm以下が好ましく、1.0μm以下がより好ましく、0.7μm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば0.1μm以上とすることができ、0.2μm以上とすることもできる。
 また、着色パターン(着色画素)のサイズ(パターン幅)としては、2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.7μm以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば0.1μm以上とすることができ、0.2μm以上とすることもできる。
The film thickness of the colored pattern (colored pixel) in the color filter is preferably 2.0 μm or less, more preferably 1.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more.
The size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 1.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more.
<画像表示装置>
 本発明の硬化膜(カラーフィルタ、遮光膜など)は、液晶表示装置又は有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などの、画像表示装置に用いることができる。
<Image display device>
The cured film (color filter, light-shielding film, etc.) of the present invention can be used for an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic electroluminescence display device.
 表示装置の定義又は各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、(株)工業調査会 1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、(株)工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 For the definition of the display device or details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., issued in 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Book Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year). The liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、カラーTFT(Thin Film Transistor)方式の液晶表示装置に用いてもよい。カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置については、例えば「カラーTFT液晶ディスプレイ(共立出版(株)1996年発行)」に記載されている。更に、本発明はIPS(In Plane Switching)などの横電界駆動方式、MVA(Multi-domain Vertical Alignment)などの画素分割方式などの視野角が拡大された液晶表示装置、STN(Super-Twist Nematic)、TN(Twisted Nematic)、VA(Vertical Alignment)、OCS(on-chip spacer)、FFS(fringe field switching)、及び、R-OCB(Reflective Optically Compensated Bend)等にも適用できる。
 また、本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なCOA(Color-filter On Array)方式にも供することが可能である。COA方式の液晶表示装置にあっては、カラーフィルタに対する要求特性は、前述のような通常の要求特性に加えて、層間絶縁膜に対する要求特性、すなわち低誘電率及び剥離液耐性が必要とされることがある。本発明のカラーフィルタは、耐光性などに優れるので、解像度が高く長期耐久性に優れたCOA方式の液晶表示装置を提供できる。なお、低誘電率の要求特性を満足するためには、カラーフィルタの上に樹脂被膜を設けてもよい。
 これらの画像表示方式については、例えば、「EL、PDP、LCDディスプレイ-技術と市場の最新動向-(東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門 2001年発行)」の43ページなどに記載されている。
The color filter in the present invention may be used for a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Furthermore, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), and a super-twist neutral (STN). TN (Twisted Nematic), VA (Vertical Alignment), OCS (On-chip spacer), FFS (Fringe field switching), and R-OCB (Reflective Optical Compensated).
In addition, the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system. In the COA type liquid crystal display device, the required characteristics for the color filter require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the stripping solution resistance, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above. Sometimes. Since the color filter of the present invention is excellent in light resistance and the like, a COA type liquid crystal display device having high resolution and excellent long-term durability can be provided. In order to satisfy the required characteristics of low dielectric constant, a resin film may be provided on the color filter.
These image display methods are described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display-latest technology and market trends (issued in 2001 by Toray Research Center Research Division)".
 液晶表示装置は、本発明におけるカラーフィルタ以外に、電極基板、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、バックライト、スペーサ、及び、視野角保障フィルムなど様々な部材から構成される。本発明のカラーフィルタは、これらの公知の部材で構成される液晶表示装置に適用できる。これらの部材については、例えば、「'94液晶ディスプレイ周辺材料・ケミカルズの市場(島 健太郎 (株)シーエムシー 1994年発行)」、「2003液晶関連市場の現状と将来展望(下巻)(表良吉(株)富士キメラ総研、2003年発行)」に記載されている。
 バックライトに関しては、SID meeting Digest 1380(2005)(A.Konno et.al)、又は、月刊ディスプレイ 2005年12月号の18~24ページ(島 康裕)、同25~30ページ(八木隆明)などに記載されている。
The liquid crystal display device is composed of various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film in addition to the color filter in the present invention. The color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members. Regarding these components, for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
Regarding backlights, SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), 25-30 pages (Takaaki Yagi), etc. It is described in.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更できる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に制限されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
<前駆体組成物の調製>
 後述する表1に記載の顔料、分散剤、及び、溶媒をそれぞれ所定量混合して、前駆体組成物を調製した。
 なお、表1中、「D/P」は、分散剤の質量/顔料の質量を表す。
 また、表1中、「前駆体組成物」欄の「粘度(25℃)(mPas)」は25℃における前駆体組成物の粘度を意図する。
 また、表1中、「処理条件」欄の「工程1液温」は工程1での前駆体組成物の液温(予熱された前駆体組成物の液温)を意図する。
 また、表1中、「処理条件」欄の「工程2液温」は工程2での前駆体組成物の液温(分散処理が施される前駆体組成物の液温)を意図する。
<Preparation of precursor composition>
Precursor compositions were prepared by mixing predetermined amounts of pigments, dispersants, and solvents described in Table 1 described below.
In Table 1, “D / P” represents the mass of the dispersant / the mass of the pigment.
In Table 1, “viscosity (25 ° C.) (mPas)” in the “precursor composition” column intends the viscosity of the precursor composition at 25 ° C.
In Table 1, “Step 1 solution temperature” in the “Processing conditions” column intends the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in Step 1 (liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition).
In Table 1, “Step 2 liquid temperature” in the “Processing conditions” column intends the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in Step 2 (liquid temperature of the precursor composition to which the dispersion treatment is applied).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
 以下に、表1に示される各成分について詳述する。 Hereinafter, each component shown in Table 1 will be described in detail.
(顔料1の作製)
 BET比表面積110m/gの酸化チタンTTO-51N(商品名:石原産業製)を120g、BET表面積300m/gのシリカ粒子AEROSIL300(登録商標)300/30(エボニック製)を25g、及び、分散剤Disperbyk190(商品名:ビックケミー社製)を100g秤量した。これらを混合したものにイオン交換水71gを加えた。そして、KURABO製MAZERSTAR KK-400Wを使用して、公転回転数1360rpm、自転回転数1047rpmにて30分間処理することにより均一な混合物水溶液を得た。この水溶液を石英容器に充填し、小型ロータリーキルン(株式会社モトヤマ製)を用いて酸素雰囲気中で920℃に加熱した後、窒素で雰囲気を置換し、同温度でアンモニアガスを100mL/minで5時間流すことにより窒化還元処理を実施した。終了後回収した粉末を乳鉢で粉砕し、Si原子を含み、粉末状の比表面積85m/gのチタンブラック(顔料1)〔チタンブラック粒子及びSi原子を含む被分散体〕を得た。
(Preparation of Pigment 1)
120 g of titanium oxide TTO-51N (trade name: manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo) with a BET specific surface area of 110 m 2 / g, 25 g of silica particles AEROSIL 300 (registered trademark) 300/30 (manufactured by Evonik) with a BET surface area of 300 m 2 / g, and Dispersant Disperbyk190 (trade name: manufactured by Big Chemie) was weighed in an amount of 100 g. 71 g of ion exchange water was added to the mixture of these. Then, using a MURASTAR KK-400W manufactured by KURABO, the mixture was processed at a revolution speed of 1360 rpm and a rotation speed of 1047 rpm for 30 minutes to obtain a uniform mixture aqueous solution. This aqueous solution is filled in a quartz container, heated to 920 ° C. in an oxygen atmosphere using a small rotary kiln (manufactured by Motoyama Co., Ltd.), then the atmosphere is replaced with nitrogen, and ammonia gas is kept at 100 mL / min for 5 hours at the same temperature. The nitriding reduction treatment was carried out by flowing. After the completion, the recovered powder was pulverized in a mortar to obtain a powdery titanium black (pigment 1) [pigment 1] containing titanium atoms and Si atoms, and containing Si atoms and a specific surface area of 85 m 2 / g.
顔料2:石原産業製TTO-51(C)(酸化チタン)
顔料3:三菱マテリアル製13M-T(チタンブラック)
顔料4:三菱マテリアル製12S(チタンブラック)
Pigment 2: TTO-51 (C) (titanium oxide) manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo
Pigment 3: Mitsubishi Materials 13M-T (Titanium Black)
Pigment 4: Mitsubishi Materials 12S (Titanium Black)
(分散剤1~2、及び、4~7の合成)
 以下に記載の分散剤1~2、及び、4~7は、特開2013-249417号公報の記載を参照して合成した。
 なお、分散剤1は式(D1)中のx/y/z(モル%)が43/8/49である化合物(酸価:75mgKOH/g)であり、分散剤4は式(D1)中のx/y/z(モル%)が63/8/29である化合物(酸価:110mgKOH/g)であり、分散剤5は式(D1)中のx/y/z(モル%)が69/8/23である化合物(酸価:120mgKOH/g)であり、分散剤6は式(D1)中のx/y/z(モル%)が14/8/78である化合物(酸価:25mgKOH/g)であり、分散剤7は式(D1)中のx/y/z(モル%)が11/8/81である化合物(酸価:20mgKOH/g)である。
(Synthesis of dispersants 1-2 and 4-7)
Dispersants 1-2 and 4-7 described below were synthesized with reference to the description of JP2013-249417A.
Dispersant 1 is a compound (acid value: 75 mgKOH / g) in which x / y / z (mol%) in formula (D1) is 43/8/49, and dispersant 4 is in formula (D1). X / y / z (mol%) of the compound is 63/8/29 (acid value: 110 mg KOH / g), and dispersant 5 has x / y / z (mol%) in formula (D1) 69/8/23 (acid value: 120 mgKOH / g), and dispersant 6 is a compound (acid value) in which x / y / z (mol%) in formula (D1) is 14/8/78 The dispersant 7 is a compound (acid value: 20 mgKOH / g) in which x / y / z (mol%) in the formula (D1) is 11/8/81.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(分散剤3の合成)
 以下に記載の分散剤3は、特開2014-62221号公報の記載を参照して合成した。なお、以下構造式中の数字は、各繰り返し単位のモル%を表す。
(Synthesis of Dispersant 3)
The dispersant 3 described below was synthesized with reference to the description in JP-A No. 2014-62221. In addition, the number in following structural formula represents the mol% of each repeating unit.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
PGME:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル
PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate PGME: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether
<工程1及び工程2>
 各実施例及び比較例の前駆体組成物を表1に記載の液温(工程1液温)となるように予熱処理を行い、所定温度に予熱された前駆体組成物をビーズミル分散機(NPM-Pilot(株式会社シンマルエンタープライゼス製))に供給し、ビーズミルにて分散処理を実施し、顔料分散物を製造した。なお、ビーズミルの条件は以下の通りである。
ビーズの種類:ジルコニアビーズ、直径0.05mm(YSZ,ニッカトー製)
本体周速:12m/s
セパレーター周速:13m/s
ビーズ充填率:65体積%
供給量:90kg/分
処理液量:15kg
冷媒種類:ナイブライン Z-1型 (東京理科器械株式会社)
 なお、比較例1~3では表1に記載の液温となるように前駆体組成物の冷却処理を実施し、比較例7では前駆体組成物の予熱処理は実施しなかった。
<Step 1 and Step 2>
Precursor compositions of each Example and Comparative Example were preheated to the liquid temperatures shown in Table 1 (Step 1 liquid temperature), and the precursor composition preheated to a predetermined temperature was subjected to a bead mill disperser (NPM). -Pilot (manufactured by Shinmaru Enterprises Co., Ltd.) was subjected to dispersion treatment with a bead mill to produce a pigment dispersion. The conditions of the bead mill are as follows.
Bead type: zirconia beads, diameter 0.05 mm (YSZ, manufactured by Nikkato)
Body peripheral speed: 12m / s
Separator peripheral speed: 13m / s
Bead filling rate: 65% by volume
Supply amount: 90 kg / min Treatment liquid amount: 15 kg
Refrigerant type: Nybrine Z-1 type (Tokyo Science Instruments Co., Ltd.)
In Comparative Examples 1 to 3, the precursor composition was cooled so as to have the liquid temperature shown in Table 1, and in Comparative Example 7, the precursor composition was not preheated.
 また、ビーズミルによる処理の間、前駆体組成物の液温は表1に記載の(工程2液温)に示す温度となるように調整しながら、分散処理を実施した。
 なお、分散処理の終了に関しては、以下の基準に従って、行った。各実施例及び比較例での処理時間は表1にまとめて示す。
 なお、各実施例及び比較例の分散処理の終了時期は、以下のようにして決定した。
 分散処理を行っている最中に処理液を10分毎に0.063mLサンプリングして、サンプルリングした試料を10gのプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートに混合して測定試料を調製し、マイクロトラックEX-150(日機装製)により顔料の平均粒子径(D90)を測定する。10分毎にサンプリングした試料の平均粒子径(D90)の変化が10nm以下となった状態が、4回連続して継続したときを分散処理の終点とした。
Further, during the treatment with the bead mill, the dispersion treatment was carried out while adjusting the liquid temperature of the precursor composition to the temperature shown in (Step 2 liquid temperature) shown in Table 1.
The end of the dispersion process was performed according to the following criteria. The processing time in each example and comparative example is summarized in Table 1.
In addition, the completion | finish time of the dispersion | distribution process of each Example and a comparative example was determined as follows.
During the dispersion treatment, 0.063 mL of the processing solution was sampled every 10 minutes, and the sampled sample was mixed with 10 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate to prepare a measurement sample. Microtrack EX-150 The average particle diameter (D90) of the pigment is measured by (Nikkiso Co., Ltd.). The end point of the dispersion treatment was determined when the state in which the change in the average particle diameter (D90) of the sample sampled every 10 minutes was 10 nm or less continued four times continuously.
<顔料の一次粒子径評価>
 顔料分散物のそれぞれをプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを用いて500倍希釈し、希釈された顔料分散物をカーボン薄膜上に滴下、乾燥させて、TEM(透過型電子顕微鏡)((株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)により、各顔料分散物中に含まれる顔料粒子(被分散体)の形態観察写真を撮影した。得られた写真から、顔料粒子400個について外表面の投影面積を求め、この面積に相当する円の直径を算出し、その平均値として顔料の一次粒子径を求めた。
<Evaluation of primary particle size of pigment>
Each of the pigment dispersions was diluted 500 times with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, and the diluted pigment dispersion was dropped on a carbon thin film and dried to obtain a TEM (transmission electron microscope) (Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). Manufactured) was taken to observe the morphology of the pigment particles (dispersed material) contained in each pigment dispersion. From the obtained photograph, the projected area of the outer surface of 400 pigment particles was determined, the diameter of the circle corresponding to this area was calculated, and the primary particle diameter of the pigment was determined as the average value.
<前駆体組成物の粘度測定>
 粘度計RE-85(東機産業(株)製)を用いて、各実施例及び比較例の前駆体組成物の粘度(25℃)の測定を行なった。
<Measurement of viscosity of precursor composition>
Using a viscometer RE-85 (manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.), the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor compositions of each Example and Comparative Example was measured.
<顔料分散物中での顔料の平均粒子径の測定>
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートを用いて、顔料分散物を500倍に希釈し、マイクロトラックEX-150(日機装製)により平均粒子径(D90)を測定した。
<Measurement of average particle diameter of pigment in pigment dispersion>
The pigment dispersion was diluted 500 times with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, and the average particle size (D90) was measured with Microtrac EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso).
<顔料分散物の粘度測定>
 各実施例及び比較例にて得られた顔料分散物を所定温度にて所定時間保管して、粘度の増粘率を測定した。
 具体的には、経時前(保管前)の顔料分散物の粘度、及び、経時後(所定時間保管後)の顔料分散物の粘度をそれぞれ測定し、以下の式に従って増粘率を求めた。
 なお、保管条件としては、23℃で1か月保管する態様と、7℃で1か月保管する態様の2態様について検討を行った。
 増粘率=(経時後の顔料分散物の粘度-経過前の顔料分散物の粘度)/(経過前の顔料分散物の粘度)×100
<Measurement of viscosity of pigment dispersion>
The pigment dispersions obtained in each Example and Comparative Example were stored at a predetermined temperature for a predetermined time, and the viscosity increase rate was measured.
Specifically, the viscosity of the pigment dispersion before aging (before storage) and the viscosity of the pigment dispersion after aging (after storage for a predetermined time) were measured, and the thickening rate was determined according to the following formula.
In addition, as storage conditions, the aspect which stored for one month at 23 degreeC and the aspect stored for one month at 7 degreeC were examined.
Thickening rate = (viscosity of pigment dispersion after aging−viscosity of pigment dispersion before lapse) / (viscosity of pigment dispersion before lapse) × 100
<評価(沈降性試験)>
 沈降性試験は、所定時間経時前の顔料分散物の固形分濃度に対する、所定時間経時後の顔料分散物の固形分濃度を求め、これを指標に粒子の沈降性を評価した。
 具体的には、固形分濃度の測定は、顔料分散物を1g秤量し、165℃のオーブンで60分加熱し、加熱後の分散物量を測定し、固形分量[質量%]=加熱後の分散物量/加熱前の分散物量×100を算出した。このとき、経時後の固形分濃度の測定のために、分散液を内径5cm、容量1Lのガラス製容器に入れて23℃の環境に9ヶ月間静置したものを用い、液面上部から1cmの深さまでの上澄み液5gを採取し、固形分量[質量%]の測定を行なった。
 次に、以下の式に従って、沈降率を算出した。
 沈降率=(経時後の固形分量[質量%]-経時前の固形分量[質量%])/(経時前の固形分量[質量%])×100
<Evaluation (sedimentation test)>
In the sedimentation test, the solid content concentration of the pigment dispersion after the predetermined time with respect to the solid content concentration of the pigment dispersion before the predetermined time was determined, and the sedimentation property of the particles was evaluated using this as an index.
Specifically, the solid content concentration was measured by weighing 1 g of the pigment dispersion, heating it in an oven at 165 ° C. for 60 minutes, measuring the amount of the dispersion after heating, and solid content [mass%] = dispersion after heating Quantity / dispersion quantity before heating × 100 was calculated. At this time, in order to measure the solid content concentration after the lapse of time, the dispersion was put in a glass container having an inner diameter of 5 cm and a capacity of 1 L, and left standing in an environment of 23 ° C. for 9 months. 5 g of the supernatant liquid up to the depth of was collected, and the solid content [% by mass] was measured.
Next, the sedimentation rate was calculated according to the following formula.
Sedimentation rate = (solid content after aging [mass%] − solid content before aging [mass%]) / (solid content before aging [mass%]) × 100
 表1に示すように、本発明の製造方法によれば、顔料分散物を製造する処理時間が短くなり、かつ、得られる顔料分散物の保存安定性がより優れることが確認された。特に、工程2での前駆体組成物の液温が40℃超50℃未満の場合、より効果が優れることが確認された。
 また、実施例2と実施例10~13との比較より、分散剤の酸価が30~100mgKOH/gの場合、より効果が優れることが確認された。
 また、実施例2と実施例14~15との比較より、顔料の一次粒子径が55nm未満の場合、より効果が優れることが確認された。
 一方、工程1の温度が所定範囲でない比較例1~7においては、所望の効果が得られなかった。
As shown in Table 1, according to the production method of the present invention, it was confirmed that the treatment time for producing the pigment dispersion was shortened and the storage stability of the obtained pigment dispersion was more excellent. In particular, when the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in step 2 is higher than 40 ° C. and lower than 50 ° C., it was confirmed that the effect is more excellent.
Further, from comparison between Example 2 and Examples 10 to 13, it was confirmed that the effect was more excellent when the acid value of the dispersant was 30 to 100 mgKOH / g.
Further, from comparison between Example 2 and Examples 14 to 15, it was confirmed that the effect was more excellent when the primary particle diameter of the pigment was less than 55 nm.
On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1 to 7 in which the temperature in Step 1 was not within the predetermined range, the desired effect was not obtained.
(実施例16)
 実施例5において、顔料を、カーボンブラック(デグサ社製、商品名カラーブラック S170 平均一次粒子径17nm)に変えた他は同様にして、顔料分散物を得た。実施例5と同様の評価を行なったところ、実施例5と同等の結果を得た。この結果から、上述した他の顔料に関しても、本願の効果が得られることが確認された。
(Example 16)
A pigment dispersion was obtained in the same manner as in Example 5, except that the pigment was changed to carbon black (trade name: Color Black S170, average primary particle diameter: 17 nm, manufactured by Degussa). When the same evaluation as in Example 5 was performed, the same result as in Example 5 was obtained. From this result, it was confirmed that the effects of the present application can be obtained with respect to the other pigments described above.
(実施例17)
 実施例5において、顔料を、ピグメントレッド254(チバスペシャリティケミカルズ社製、商品名BK-CF平均一次粒子径30nm)に変えた他は同様にして、顔料分散物を得た。実施例5と同様の評価を行なったところ、実施例5と同等の結果を得た。この結果から、上述した他の顔料に関しても、本願の効果が得られることが確認された。
(Example 17)
A pigment dispersion was obtained in the same manner as in Example 5, except that the pigment was changed to Pigment Red 254 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals, trade name BK-CF average primary particle size 30 nm). When the same evaluation as in Example 5 was performed, the same result as in Example 5 was obtained. From this result, it was confirmed that the effects of the present application can be obtained with respect to the other pigments described above.
(実施例18)
 実施例5において、分散剤をDisperbyk110(商品名、ビックケミージャパン製、酸価53mgKOH/g)に変えた他は同様にして、顔料分散物を得た。実施例5と同様の評価を行なったところ、実施例5と同等の結果を得た。この結果から、他の分散剤に関しても、本願の効果が得られることが確認された。
(Example 18)
A pigment dispersion was obtained in the same manner as in Example 5 except that the dispersant was changed to Disperbyk110 (trade name, manufactured by Big Chemie Japan, acid value 53 mgKOH / g). When the same evaluation as in Example 5 was performed, the same result as in Example 5 was obtained. From this result, it was confirmed that the effects of the present application can be obtained with respect to other dispersants.
(実施例19)
 実施例1において、固形分濃度を濃くして、前駆体組成物の粘度(25℃)が17mPa・sになるよう調整し、分散処理を行なった。実施例1より分散の処理時間がかかったが、略同様の評価結果が得られた。
(Example 19)
In Example 1, the solid content concentration was increased to adjust the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor composition to 17 mPa · s, and the dispersion treatment was performed. Although the dispersion processing time was longer than that in Example 1, substantially the same evaluation results were obtained.
(実施例20)
 分散処理において直径0.1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いた以外は、実施例1と同様にして分散処理を行なった。実施例1より分散の時間がかかったほか、顔料分散物の収率が低下した。各種評価を行なったところ、実施例1と比較し、9ヶ月経過後の固形分沈降量が3.0%となった以外は実施例1と同様の評価結果が得られた。
(Example 20)
The dispersion treatment was performed in the same manner as in Example 1 except that zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.1 mm were used in the dispersion treatment. In addition to the time required for dispersion in Example 1, the yield of the pigment dispersion decreased. As a result of various evaluations, the same evaluation results as in Example 1 were obtained except that the amount of solid content sedimentation after 9 months was 3.0% as compared with Example 1.
(比較例8)
 実施例1において、固形分濃度を濃くして、前駆体組成物の粘度(25℃)が23mPa・sになるよう調整し、分散処理を行なった。9ヶ月経過後の固形分沈降量が11.2%となり、保存安定性が劣ることが分かった。
(Comparative Example 8)
In Example 1, the solid content concentration was increased to adjust the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor composition to 23 mPa · s, and the dispersion treatment was performed. The solid content sedimentation amount after 9 months was 11.2%, and it was found that the storage stability was inferior.
(比較例9)
 実施例1において、固形分濃度を薄くして、前駆体組成物の粘度(25℃)が2mPasになるよう調整し、分散処理を行なった。処理時間が20時間超となり、分散に時間がかかった。
(Comparative Example 9)
In Example 1, the solid content concentration was reduced, the viscosity (25 ° C.) of the precursor composition was adjusted to 2 mPas, and the dispersion treatment was performed. Processing time exceeded 20 hours, and dispersion took time.
(バインダー溶液1の調製)
 1,000mL三口フラスコに1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール159gを入れ、窒素気流下、85℃まで加熱した。これに、ベンジルメタクリレート63.4g、メタクリル酸72.3g、V-601(和光純薬製)4.15gを1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール159gに添加して調製した溶液を、2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、更に5時間加熱して反応させた。
 次いで、加熱を止め、ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸(30/70mol比)の共重合体を含む溶液を得た。
 次に、得られた共重合体溶液の内、120.0gを、300mL三口フラスコに移し、グリシジルメタクリレート16.6g、p-メトキシフェノール0.16gを加え、撹拌し溶解させた。溶解後、トリフェニルホスフィン3.0gを加え、100℃に加熱し、付加反応を行った。グリシジルメタクリレートが消失したことを、ガスクロマトグラフィーで確認し、加熱を止めた。反応液に、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール184gを加え、重量平均分子量12,000(GPC法により求めたポリスチレン換算値)、酸価35mgKOH/g、固形分30質量%のバインダー溶液1を調製した。
(Preparation of binder solution 1)
In a 1,000 mL three-necked flask, 159 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol was placed and heated to 85 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. A solution prepared by adding 63.4 g of benzyl methacrylate, 72.3 g of methacrylic acid and 4.15 g of V-601 (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) to 159 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added dropwise over 2 hours. did. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was further continued by heating for 5 hours.
Subsequently, the heating was stopped to obtain a solution containing a copolymer of benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid (30/70 mol ratio).
Next, 120.0 g of the obtained copolymer solution was transferred to a 300 mL three-necked flask, and 16.6 g of glycidyl methacrylate and 0.16 g of p-methoxyphenol were added and stirred to dissolve. After dissolution, 3.0 g of triphenylphosphine was added and heated to 100 ° C. to carry out an addition reaction. The disappearance of glycidyl methacrylate was confirmed by gas chromatography, and heating was stopped. 184 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol was added to the reaction solution to prepare a binder solution 1 having a weight average molecular weight of 12,000 (polystyrene conversion value determined by GPC method), an acid value of 35 mgKOH / g, and a solid content of 30% by mass. .
(硬化性組成物Aの調製)
 下記組成の成分を攪拌機で混合し、フィルタでろ過して、硬化性組成物Aを調製した。なお、以下の「部」は質量部を意図する。
(組成)
・(A)実施例1の顔料分散物                 50部
・(F-1)アルカリ可溶性樹脂:バインダー溶液1     17.0部
・(B)重合性化合物:KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬(株)製)
                              5.0部
・(C)重合開始剤:IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)
                              2.5部
・(F-4)重合禁止剤:p-メトキシフェノール     0.003部
・(F-6)界面活性剤:メガファックF781(フッ素系界面活性剤、
   大日本インキ化学工業(株)製)           0.01部
・有機溶媒:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート 10部
・有機溶媒:シクロヘキサノン                 10部
(Preparation of curable composition A)
Components of the following composition were mixed with a stirrer and filtered through a filter to prepare curable composition A. In addition, the following "part" intends a mass part.
(composition)
(A) 50 parts of the pigment dispersion of Example 1 (F-1) Alkali-soluble resin: 17.0 parts of binder solution 1 (B) Polymerizable compound: KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
5.0 parts (C) Polymerization initiator: IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF)
2.5 parts · (F-4) polymerization inhibitor: p-methoxyphenol 0.003 parts · (F-6) surfactant: MegaFac F781 (fluorine type surfactant,
Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.01 parts Organic solvent: 10 parts propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate Organic solvent: 10 parts cyclohexanone
 調液直後の硬化性組成物Aをスプレー塗布装置の溶液カップに入れて、以下の塗布及び加熱条件でガラス基板に塗布を行い、更に硬化処理を施して、硬化膜1を形成した。
スプレー塗布装置:GSIクレオス製 PS-268
スプレー塗布空気圧条件:3000cc/分
塗布量:0.2cc/分
ノズル径:0.4mm
スプレーの吐出口とガラス基板塗布面は垂直の向きに設置。
スプレーの吐出口とガラス基板の距離:3cm
スプレーの散布角度*:90度
(*スプレーの吐出口からガラス基板への法線から左右両方への角度)
 塗布部分の平均膜厚が2.5μmとなるまでスプレー塗布実施し、塗布後ホットプレートにて120℃で2分加熱した。
The curable composition A immediately after preparation was put in a solution cup of a spray coating apparatus, applied to a glass substrate under the following application and heating conditions, and further subjected to a curing treatment to form a cured film 1.
Spray coating device: PS-268 made by GSI Creos
Spray application air pressure condition: 3000 cc / min Application amount: 0.2 cc / min Nozzle diameter: 0.4 mm
The spray outlet and the glass substrate coating surface are installed vertically.
Distance between spray outlet and glass substrate: 3cm
Spray spray angle *: 90 degrees (* An angle from the spray outlet to the glass substrate from the normal to both sides)
Spray coating was performed until the average film thickness of the coated portion was 2.5 μm, and after coating, the coating was heated on a hot plate at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes.
(スプレー塗布の目詰まり評価)
 硬化性組成物Aについて、以下の条件でスプレー塗布を行い、目詰まりを評価した。
 スプレー塗布装置:GSIクレオス製 PS-268
 スプレー塗布装置の溶液カップに評価する硬化性組成物Aを入れ、25℃にて96時間放置した後、上記スプレー塗布装置により以下の条件で塗布を行い、目詰まりが発生するしないを評価したところ、目詰まりなく塗布することができた。
スプレー塗布空気圧条件:3000cc/分
塗布量:0.2cc/分
ノズル径:0.4mm
(Evaluation of clogging of spray application)
About the curable composition A, spray coating was performed on the following conditions, and clogging was evaluated.
Spray coating device: PS-268 made by GSI Creos
The curable composition A to be evaluated is put in a solution cup of a spray coating apparatus, and after being allowed to stand at 25 ° C. for 96 hours, coating is performed under the following conditions with the spray coating apparatus, and evaluation is made on whether clogging occurs. It was possible to apply without clogging.
Spray application air pressure condition: 3000 cc / min Application amount: 0.2 cc / min Nozzle diameter: 0.4 mm
(表面反射率の測定)
 上記で得られた硬化膜1を、日立ハイテクノロジー製分光光度計、U-4100にて、波長450nmで表面反射率を測定し(入射角度5度)、反射率を%にて測定した。
 特に固体撮像素子用途の場合、4%以下の表面反射率ならば実用性があると判断する。得られた結果は以下である。
 表面反射率:0.38%
(Measurement of surface reflectance)
The cured film 1 obtained above was measured for surface reflectance at a wavelength of 450 nm (incident angle of 5 degrees) with a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi High Technology, U-4100, and the reflectance was measured in%.
In particular, in the case of a solid-state imaging device application, it is judged that there is practicality if the surface reflectance is 4% or less. The results obtained are as follows.
Surface reflectance: 0.38%
(遮光性)
 上記で得られた硬化膜1を、日立ハイテクノロジー製分光光度計、U-4100にて、波長550nmにおける透過率を測定し、遮光率の指標とした。特に固体撮像素子用途の場合、1%以下の透過率ならば実用性があると判断する。得られた結果は以下である。
透過率:0.004%
(Light shielding)
The cured film 1 obtained above was measured for transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm with a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi High-Technology Co., Ltd. U-4100, and used as an indicator of light shielding rate. In particular, in the case of a solid-state imaging device application, it is determined that there is practicality if the transmittance is 1% or less. The results obtained are as follows.
Transmittance: 0.004%
 これらの結果より、本発明の硬化膜はスプレー塗布適性が良好で、遮光性、及び、反射防止能に優れることがわかった。
 また、この結果から、本願の顔料分散物を用いて製造された硬化膜は遮光性、反射防止能に優れるため、遮光層を具備する固体撮像素子、カラーフィルタ、及びブラックマトリクス、更には、それらを具備した画像表示装置の製造に好適に用いることができる。
From these results, it was found that the cured film of the present invention has good spray application suitability, and excellent light shielding properties and antireflection performance.
Further, from this result, the cured film produced using the pigment dispersion of the present application is excellent in light shielding properties and antireflection performance, so that a solid-state imaging device having a light shielding layer, a color filter, a black matrix, and further It can be used suitably for manufacture of the image display apparatus which comprised.
 2,20,30,40 固体撮像装置
 3 CMOSセンサ
 4 回路基板
 5 セラミック基板
 5a 開口
 5b 内壁面
 6 IRカットフィルタ
 7 撮影レンズ
 8 レンズホルダ
 9 保持筒
 10,11,21,31,41 遮光膜(遮光層)
 12 黒色層
 14 被覆層
 100 基板
 200  タンク
 300  配管
 500  ビーズミル分散機
2, 20, 30, 40 Solid-state imaging device 3 CMOS sensor 4 Circuit board 5 Ceramic substrate 5a Opening 5b Inner wall surface 6 IR cut filter 7 Shooting lens 8 Lens holder 9 Holding cylinder 10, 11, 21, 31, 41 Light shielding film (light shielding layer)
12 Black layer 14 Coating layer 100 Substrate 200 Tank 300 Piping 500 Bead mill disperser

Claims (11)

  1.  顔料と、分散剤と、有機溶媒とを含み、25℃における粘度が3~20mPa・sである前駆体組成物を予熱する工程1と、
     予熱された前記前駆体組成物の液温を40℃以上60℃未満に保ちつつ、前記前駆体組成物に対してビーズミルによる分散処理を施す工程2と、を有する顔料分散物の製造方法。
    Step 1 of preheating a precursor composition containing a pigment, a dispersant, and an organic solvent and having a viscosity of 3 to 20 mPa · s at 25 ° C .;
    And a step 2 of subjecting the precursor composition to a dispersion treatment by a bead mill while keeping the liquid temperature of the preheated precursor composition at 40 ° C. or more and less than 60 ° C.
  2.  前記顔料の一次粒子径が55nm未満である、請求項1に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。 The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to claim 1, wherein the primary particle diameter of the pigment is less than 55 nm.
  3.  前記分散剤の酸価が30~100mgKOH/gである、請求項1又は2に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。 The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the acid value of the dispersant is from 30 to 100 mgKOH / g.
  4.  前記ビーズミルにて、直径0.05mm以下のビーズを用いる、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。 The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein beads having a diameter of 0.05 mm or less are used in the bead mill.
  5.  前記工程1において、前記前駆体組成物の液温が40~60℃に予熱される、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。 The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein in the step 1, the liquid temperature of the precursor composition is preheated to 40 to 60 ° C.
  6.  前記工程2での前記前駆体組成物の液温が40℃超57℃未満に保たれる、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の顔料分散物の製造方法。 The method for producing a pigment dispersion according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the liquid temperature of the precursor composition in the step 2 is maintained at more than 40 ° C and less than 57 ° C.
  7.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、を有する硬化性組成物の製造方法。
    Obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    A method of producing a curable composition comprising: a step of mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the above step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition.
  8.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜の製造方法。
    Obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the above step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
    Curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
  9.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜を具備する固体撮像素子の製造方法。
    Obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the above step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
    A method for producing a solid-state imaging device, comprising: a step of curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
  10.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜を具備するカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    Obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the above step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
    A method for producing a color filter comprising a cured film comprising: a step of curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
  11.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の製造方法で顔料分散物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた顔料分散物と、重合開始剤と、重合性化合物と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂とを混合し、硬化性組成物を得る工程と、
     前記工程で得られた硬化性組成物を硬化させ、硬化膜を得る工程と、を有する硬化膜を具備する画像表示装置の製造方法。
    Obtaining a pigment dispersion by the production method according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    Mixing the pigment dispersion obtained in the above step, a polymerization initiator, a polymerizable compound, and an alkali-soluble resin to obtain a curable composition;
    And a step of curing the curable composition obtained in the step to obtain a cured film.
PCT/JP2016/078165 2015-09-30 2016-09-26 Method for producing pigment dispersion, method for producing curable composition, method for producing cured film, method for producing solid-state imaging element equipped with cured film, method for producing color filter equipped with cured film, and method for producing image display device equipped with cured film WO2017057222A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201680051980.5A CN108026402A (en) 2015-09-30 2016-09-26 The manufacture method of pigment dispersion, the manufacture method of solidification compound, the manufacture method of cured film, possess cured film solid-state imager manufacture method, possess cured film colour filter manufacture method and possess cured film image display device manufacture method
JP2017543229A JP6644803B2 (en) 2015-09-30 2016-09-26 A method for producing a pigment dispersion, a method for producing a curable composition, a method for producing a cured film, a method for producing a solid-state imaging device having a cured film, a method for producing a color filter having a cured film, and a method for producing a cured film Of manufacturing image display device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015-193529 2015-09-30
JP2015193529 2015-09-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017057222A1 true WO2017057222A1 (en) 2017-04-06

Family

ID=58423468

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/078165 WO2017057222A1 (en) 2015-09-30 2016-09-26 Method for producing pigment dispersion, method for producing curable composition, method for producing cured film, method for producing solid-state imaging element equipped with cured film, method for producing color filter equipped with cured film, and method for producing image display device equipped with cured film

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6644803B2 (en)
CN (1) CN108026402A (en)
WO (1) WO2017057222A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3705542A1 (en) * 2019-03-07 2020-09-09 Orion Engineered Carbons GmbH Universally dispersible solid pigment preparation, preparation and use thereof

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006011338A1 (en) * 2004-07-06 2006-02-02 Sakata Inx Corp. Pigment dispersion composition, use thereof and compound for treating pigment
JP2008001796A (en) * 2006-06-22 2008-01-10 Toda Kogyo Corp Colorant for color filter, colorant composition for color filter containing the colorant for color filter and color filter
JP2008036626A (en) * 2006-07-14 2008-02-21 Toray Ind Inc Method for manufacturing inorganic particle dispersion, paste composition using this manufacturing method and method for manufacturing resin composition
JP2008233620A (en) * 2007-03-22 2008-10-02 Dic Corp Blue pigment dispersion element for color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and color filter using it
JP2009235263A (en) * 2008-03-27 2009-10-15 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Pigment dispersion for color filter, coloring composition for color filter and method for producing the pigment dispersion for color filter
JP2011118367A (en) * 2009-10-26 2011-06-16 Sakata Corp Color composition for black matrix
JP2013049827A (en) * 2011-07-29 2013-03-14 Fujifilm Corp Method for producing azo pigment
JP2014015492A (en) * 2012-07-05 2014-01-30 Riso Kagaku Corp Method of producing pigment dispersion

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101082684B (en) * 2006-06-02 2011-01-19 富士胶片株式会社 Paint dispersion combination, optical solidification combination, filter produced thereof and producing method
JP5251186B2 (en) * 2007-03-20 2013-07-31 三菱化学株式会社 Aqueous pigment dispersion, ink composition, and inkjet recording method
KR102031127B1 (en) * 2013-10-03 2019-10-11 동우 화인켐 주식회사 Dye dispersion

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006011338A1 (en) * 2004-07-06 2006-02-02 Sakata Inx Corp. Pigment dispersion composition, use thereof and compound for treating pigment
JP2008001796A (en) * 2006-06-22 2008-01-10 Toda Kogyo Corp Colorant for color filter, colorant composition for color filter containing the colorant for color filter and color filter
JP2008036626A (en) * 2006-07-14 2008-02-21 Toray Ind Inc Method for manufacturing inorganic particle dispersion, paste composition using this manufacturing method and method for manufacturing resin composition
JP2008233620A (en) * 2007-03-22 2008-10-02 Dic Corp Blue pigment dispersion element for color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and color filter using it
JP2009235263A (en) * 2008-03-27 2009-10-15 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Pigment dispersion for color filter, coloring composition for color filter and method for producing the pigment dispersion for color filter
JP2011118367A (en) * 2009-10-26 2011-06-16 Sakata Corp Color composition for black matrix
JP2013049827A (en) * 2011-07-29 2013-03-14 Fujifilm Corp Method for producing azo pigment
JP2014015492A (en) * 2012-07-05 2014-01-30 Riso Kagaku Corp Method of producing pigment dispersion

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6644803B2 (en) 2020-02-12
CN108026402A (en) 2018-05-11
JPWO2017057222A1 (en) 2018-08-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5398759B2 (en) Shielding film, manufacturing method thereof, and solid-state imaging device
WO2016158114A1 (en) Coloring photosensitive composition, cured film, pattern forming method, infrared blocking filter with light shielding film, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor
KR101949775B1 (en) Curable composition, infrared cut filter with light-shielding film, and solid-state imaging device
WO2017203979A1 (en) Curable composition, cured film, color filter, light blocking film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for producing cured film
JP2020114925A (en) Dispersion composition, curable composition, light-shielding film, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, resin, and method for manufacturing cured film
JP7109624B2 (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6818751B2 (en) Curable composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state image sensor, image display device, method for producing cured film, and polyfunctional thiol compound.
JP6573982B2 (en) Curable composition, method for producing cured film, color filter, light shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP2015034983A (en) Light shielding composition, light shielding film and method of producing the same
JPWO2017150093A1 (en) Composition, method of producing composition, cured film, color filter, light shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2017169584A1 (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element and image display device
JP6727344B2 (en) Curable composition, compound, cured film, method for producing cured film, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, infrared sensor
WO2016129342A1 (en) Pigment dispersion composition and manufacturing method therefor, polymerizable composition, light-blocking film, and solid-state imaging apparatus
JP6797889B2 (en) Curable composition, light-shielding film, solid-state image sensor, and color filter
JP6529419B2 (en) Curable composition, method of producing cured film, color filter, light shielding film, solid-state imaging device and image display device
WO2017134858A1 (en) Dispersion composition, curable composition, light-blocking film, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
JP2020013156A (en) Production method of cured film, cured film, solid-state image pickup device and image display device
JP6644803B2 (en) A method for producing a pigment dispersion, a method for producing a curable composition, a method for producing a cured film, a method for producing a solid-state imaging device having a cured film, a method for producing a color filter having a cured film, and a method for producing a cured film Of manufacturing image display device
JP6476198B2 (en) Photosensitive black resin composition, method for producing black cured film, color filter, and organic EL display device
JP6588276B2 (en) Curable composition, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2019077913A1 (en) Colored composition, film, color filter, solid imaging element, and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16851393

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017543229

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16851393

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1